Black Box Network Router LRU4240 User Manual

LRU4240  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
User Guide  
Software revision 2.3RT  
TECHNICAL:  
SALES:  
0118 96 56 000  
0870 90 10 750  
Part 098-04240-18 Rev. 12  
October 2003  
FAX:  
0118 96 55 001  
ADDRESS:  
WEB:  
464 Basingstoke Road, Reading, Berkshire RG2 0BG  
www.blackbox.co.uk  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Copyright  
Copyright © 1998, BLACK BOX Ltd  
World copyright reserved. No part of this publication may be stored in a retrieval system,  
transmitted, or reproduced in any way, including but not limited to photocopy, photograph,  
magnetic, chemical, or other record, without the prior agreement and written permission of  
BLACK BOX Ltd.  
ISO Compliance  
Products Manufactured Under  
An ISO 9001 Certified  
Quality Management System  
Warning  
Caution  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router complies with FCC Part 15 of the Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) Rules concerning radio frequency emissions for Class A computing  
devices. The following section is required by the FCC.  
In accordance with FCC Part 15 section 15.21, changes or modifications made by the buyer that  
are not expressly approved by BLACK BOX Ltd could void the buyer’s authority to operate  
this equipment.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial  
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to  
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause  
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his  
own expense.  
This Class A digital device meets all requirementsof the Canadian Interference-Causing  
Equipment Regulations.  
Cet Appareil numerique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le  
materiel brouilleur du Canada.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
NOTE: As per the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology  
Equipment (VCCI), the Dual Trunk E1 Router complies with VCCI Class 1 ITE. This  
equipment is in the 1st Class category (information equipment to be used in commercial and/or  
industrial areas) and conforms to the standards set by the Voluntary Control Council for  
Interference by Information Technology Equipment aimed at preventing radio interference in  
commercial and/or industrial areas. Consequently, when used in a residential area or in an  
adjacent area thereto, radio interference may be caused to radios and TV receivers, etc. Read  
the instructions for correct handling.  
Regulatory Information  
The equipment complies with the following applicable European Directives 73/23/EEC,  
89/336/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC and 1995/5-EC.  
Customer Information  
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. You will find the label located on the  
bottom of the enclosure. This label contains the FCC Registration Number and Ringer  
Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment. You must, upon request, provide this  
information to your telephone company.  
Incidence of harm: If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the  
telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you  
in advance. But if advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You  
will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.  
Rights of the telephone company: Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities,  
equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of your equipment.  
If they do, you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted  
telephone service.  
Malfunction of the equipment: In the event this equipment should fail to operate properly,  
disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Try using another FCC approved telephone in the  
same telephone jack. If the trouble does not persist and appears to be with this unit, disconnect  
the unit from the telephone line and discontinue use of the unit until it is repaired. Please note  
that the telephone company may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the telephone  
network until the problem has been corrected or until you’re sure that the equipment is not  
malfunctioning.  
iv  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
35  
Unit ConfigurationMenu 4A  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E1 NTU with QoS User’s Guide  
16  
SALES:0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dula Trunk E1 Router  
Preface  
AUDIENCE  
This Dual Trunk E1 Router Users Guide is intended for network professionals who want  
instructions for installing and configuring their digital service unit router.  
ORGANIZATION  
Chapter 1, Product Overview,” provides a description of the features of the Dual Trunk  
E1 Router, and its placement in a Wide Area Network.  
Chapter 2, Installation,” provides a description of the LRU4240, the components you  
should have received in your shipping carton, and the hardware requirements for setting up  
the LRU4240 in your network.  
Chapter 3, Terminal Setup,” provides instructions on connecting your device to a  
terminal, logging on to the device; explains how to navigate the terminal screens and  
configure your device to work with your network.  
Chapter 4, Access Configuration,” contains information about configuring the LAN and  
WAN interfaces, the interface IP addresses, NMS IP addresses, Radius authentication,  
DHCP, and miscellanous management settings.  
Chapter 5, Bridging Configuration,” contains configuration procedures for bridging and  
VLAN Bridging applications  
Chapter 6, Routing Configuration,” contains configuration procedures for static and  
dynamic routing, and Network Address Translation (NAT)  
Chapter 7, Firewall Configuration,” contains configuration procedures for the firewall  
access list  
Chapter 8, Diagnostics,” describes the E1 and in-band tests that can be used to verify the  
operation of the device and its associated cabling and equipment.  
Chapter 9, Monitoring and Management,” describes how to monitor and manage the  
LRU4240 router. Provides instructions on the option of collecting RMON-2 data.  
Chapter 10, Alarms,” describes alarm conditions and alarm configuration parameters.  
Chapter 11, Troubleshooting,” provides solutions to specific problems.  
Appendix A, “Specifications,” provides regulatory compliance information, as well as the  
electrical, physical, and networking characteristics.  
Appendix B, “Cables and Connector Pin Assignments,” details connector and pin  
assignments.  
Appendix C, “Software Upgrade” software upgrades and download procedures.  
Appendix D, “Menus,” details software menus command and parameters.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
interface commands and parameters  
CONVENTIONS  
This section describes the conventions used to delineate specific types of information  
throughout Black Box user guides.  
Symbols  
Symbols denote text that requires special attention. The information contained alongside a  
symbol corresponds to one of four levels of severity:  
NOTE: Follow guidelines in this, or the previous, paragraph to use the Black  
Box product more effectively.  
CAUTION: Follow guidelines in this, or the previous, paragraph to avoid  
equipment damage or faulty application.  
WARNING: Follow the instructions in this, or the previous, paragraph to  
avoid personal injury.  
ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE — CAUTION: Follow the instructions in this,  
or the previous, paragraph to avoid the discharge of static electricity, and  
subsequent damage to the equipment.  
10  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Typography  
This manual delineates the names of files, commands, and actions by using the fonts and  
typefaces described in the following table:  
Typeface or  
Symbol  
Purpose  
Example  
Courier  
Font  
AaBbCc123  
The names of commands, files, and  
directories, as well as on-screen  
computer output.  
Edit your.login file.  
Use ls -a to list all files.  
machine_name% You have  
mail.  
Courier  
The input you provide, as contrasted with machine_name% su  
Font, Bold  
AaBbCc123  
on-screen computer output.  
Keystrokes that you must provide to use  
the application.  
Press Ctrl-Lto refresh the screen.  
Palatino Font,  
Italic  
Command-line placeholder that you  
replace with a real name or value.  
To delete a file, type rmfilename  
AaBbCc123  
Book titles, new words or terms, or  
words that need to be emphasized.  
Refer to Chapter 6 in the User Guide.  
These are called class options.  
You must be logged in as root to access  
this directory.  
Symbol that denotes a single-step  
procedure or task. Procedures requiring  
more than one task are numbered.  
Zapf Dingbats  
Font  
Palatino Font,  
Bold Blue,  
Underscore  
AaBbCc123  
Hyperlinks in the table of contents.When  
viewing the Portable Document Format  
(PDF) version of the user guide, you can  
click on one of these to jump directly to  
the selected subject matter.  
Palatino Font,  
Blue  
Hyperlinks throughout general text.  
AaBbCc123  
or  
AaBbCc123  
Helvetica Bold Denotes actual markings on front or back Attach the cable to the TERMINAL port  
panels.  
BLACK BOX TECHNICAL SUPPORT  
If you should experience difficulty with the setup and/or operation of your Black Box  
equipment, the Black Box Technical Support staff can assist you at any time.  
Telephone  
FAX  
0118 96 56 000  
0118 96 55 001  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Internet  
www.blackbox.co.uk  
RETURNING A UNIT  
Use the following procedure if you need to return a unit for service or repair,  
1. Contact the Black Box Customer Service Department at  
0870 90 10 750, or fax a request to 0118 96 55 001 to obtain an ERN  
(Equipment Returns Number) number.  
2. Package the unit carefully and, before sealing the shipping carton, include any  
information you can provide about the problems you are currently experiencing  
with the unit.  
3. Attach an address label to the shipping carton. Be sure to include the ERN  
number:  
Customer Service Department  
Black Box  
464 Basingstoke Road  
Reading, Berkshire RG2 0BG  
ERN # ___________  
SEND US YOUR COMMENTS  
Please let us know if this user guide meets your requirements.  
Does the manual answer your questions?  
Is the manual thorough?  
Is the manual easy to use: can you find the information you need?  
Is anything missing from the manual?  
What would you like to see in the manual?  
Black Box  
FAX  
0118 96 55 001  
All suggestions and comments are appreciated.  
12  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Product Overview  
1
PRODUCT OVERVIEW  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router is an intelligent network access solution providing connectivity to public  
and private packet-based networks. Available as a standalone unit it integrates a dual CSU/DSU,  
routing, and WAN Probe in one single platform.  
Figure 1-1  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router supports bridging, static routing, and dynamic routing RIP1, RIP2, and  
OSPF. The two E1 links can be configured as either two independent PPP or Frame Relay links to  
different destinations, or a single multilink connection (MLPPP or MLFR FRF.16 ) to one  
destination for load balancing and link redundancy application. A firewall permits or denies access  
based on source and destination IP addresses.  
Configuration and troubleshooting is accessible to novice and advanced users with the availability  
of a menu-based Terminal User Interface and an industry-standard Command Line Interface (CLI).  
Complete router configuration can be automated remotely by downloading router configuration  
files.  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router is SNMP-manageable, offers menu-driven configuration, includes  
comprehensive diagnostics, in-band management, and network performance monitoring (RMON1  
and RMON2). These tools provide visibility on the usage of the WAN connections.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
APPLICATIONS  
Dual independent links application  
Load balancing  
When multiple paths exist to the same destination, sending all IP packets on a single route is  
probably not the most efficient use of the available bandwidth. Load balancing is the practice of  
distributing traffic among multiple paths to the same destination to achieve higher throughput and  
avoid delays.  
The Dual E1 Trunk Router IP routing engine maintains a cost metric parameter with each route  
learnt dynamically or programmed statically. If more than one route of equal cost is found for a  
particular destination, the routing engine will distribute the packets equally among the available  
routes using a round-robin algorithm.  
If multiple routes are found with unequal costs then the route with lesser cost metric is chosen.  
Redundancy  
With multiple paths to the same destination, the routing engine also performs redundancy at both  
the physical layer and the network layer. By monitoring the status of the physical link interface and  
the PPP negotiation, the unit knows when a link is physically down or a PPP connection is down.  
When either events occurs, the routing engine will balance traffic to the active link.  
14  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Multilink application  
Multilink PPP (MLPPP) or Multilink Frame Relay (MLFR) bundles the two E1 ports to pass traffic  
at twice the speed of a single E1 link. The standard MLPPP per RFC1990 facilitates interoperability  
with routers from other router vendors.  
A pair of Dual E1 Trunk Router can be deployed in a a back-to-back configuration offering a high-  
speed 4 Mbps point-to-point LAN extension.  
Redundancy  
With multilink, redundancy is performed at the link layer, if a link is down the traffic is still carried  
over the active link. If a failed link comes back up again it is automatically added to the bundle, and  
traffic resumes at twice the speed again.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
MONITORING THE ENTIRE WAN PROTOCOL STACK  
With the Dual Trunk E1 Router you can monitor the entire WAN protocol stack. Higher level  
protocols can be monitored using RMON-2. PPP connections can be monitored using RMON-1, and  
the physical layer can be monitored using diagnostic capabilities as outlined in RFC 1406.  
Monitoring Higher Protocol Layers  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router includes RMON-2 capabilities. This lets you identify the Top Talkers  
(256 greatest bandwidth users), and drill down to the Top Applications to see which applications are  
using the most bandwidth. It also lets you track and report traffic sent between pairs of network  
addresses and categorizes them by applications and protocols.  
Table 1-2 lists the RMON tables supported in RMON-2.  
Table 1-1 RMON-2 Tables  
RMON-2  
Protocol Directory  
Network Layer Host  
Protocol Distribution  
Application Layer Host  
Network layer matrix group  
Application layer matrix group  
Using the optional ChoiceView Plus software application, you can display the statistics gathered by  
RMON-2.  
Table 1-2 RMON Tables  
RMON-1  
RMON-2  
(Provided with Level 2 & 3) (Option for Level 2 & 3)  
History  
Events  
Protocol Directory  
Network Layer Host  
Protocol Distribution  
Application Layer Host  
Statistics  
Alarms  
To take advantage of the Dual Trunk E1 Router’s RMON-2 capabilities, Black Box has created an  
application, ChoiceView Plus, that allows you to display RMON-2 data in real-time, graphical, and  
tabular formats.  
16  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Installation  
2
UNPACKING AND CHECKING EQUIPMENT  
Before you begin the installation, you need to:  
Unpack and inspect the LRU4240 for damage that may have occurred during shipment  
Save all enclosed packing slips, documents, shipping cartons, and packing materials until you  
have completed the installation and verified the unit’s operation  
Package Contents  
Make sure that you have received all the items ordered.  
LRU4240 Dual Trunk E1 Router  
A User Guide  
BEFORE YOU INSTALL  
Dual Trunk E1 Router operation requires the proper data port, com port and network cables. If you  
don’t have the correct cables, they may be ordered by calling Black Box at (0118) 965-5100 and  
asking for Inside Sales, or you may order from the Black Box Online Store on our web site:  
www.blackbox.co.uk.  
SITE REQUIREMENTS  
Install the LRU4240 in accordance with the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, Articles 110-  
16, 110-17, and 110-18. This code defines an access area such as a dedicated equipment room or  
closet that is clean, well-ventilated, and free of environmental extremes. Allow .5 - 1.0 m (2-3 feet)  
of clearance around the unit for access during installation.  
The operating environment of the LRU4240 is shown in Table .  
Table 2-1 Site Environmental Requirements  
Item  
Specification  
Operating Temperature  
Storage Temperature  
Relative Humidity  
Maximum Altitude  
0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F) ambient  
-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to 140°F)  
0% to 95% noncondensing  
4.6 km (15,000 ft)  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Do no  
Voltages as high as 200 VDC may exist at the telephone company’s E1 interface in  
the form of simplex power. These voltages are hazardous and can cause death or  
severe injury! Do not proceed with this installation if any voltage is present between  
the send and receive pairs of the network interface. You can ask the serving telephone  
company to temporarily disconnect the simplex power during installation.  
INSTALLATION  
The following procedures outline the steps necessary to install the Dual Trunk E1 Router, power the  
device, and attach it to a terminal.  
Installing the Dual Trunk E1 Router  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router should be installed on a flat, stable surface or mounted on a tray.  
To install the Dual Trunk E1 Router on a flat surface:  
1. Remove the covering from the four stick-on rubber pads and attach them to the bottom  
of the unit.  
2. Place the unit on a flat, stable surface.  
You may stack other units on top of the Dual Trunk E1 Router.  
Installation Using AC Power  
To install the Dual Trunk E1 Router using AC power, follow the step below and refer to Figure 2-1:  
Insert the power cable into the power receptacle on the Dual Trunk E1 Router rear panel. Connect  
the other end to the AC outlet.  
The LEDs on the front panel flash and status messages appear on the alphanumeric display as the  
Dual Trunk E1 Router runs the Self Test at power up.  
NOTE: DC Power may be used as a primary power source or as a backup  
power source, should AC power fail.  
18  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Reserved  
(DTE 2)  
Network BNC  
AUX BNC  
Ground Stud  
Network Port  
(AUX)  
COMM Port Network Port  
Ethernet Port  
DC Power Connector  
Reserved  
(DTE 1)  
AC Power Connector  
Figure 2-1  
Back Panel View–Ports and Ground Stud  
Installation Using DC Power  
You need a tray cable that is UL recognized 14 AWG, 3 conductors, copper strand wire, electrical  
power and control cable, type TC: tray cable, 600 V 90°C. Alpha Wire Company No. 45443 is an  
example.  
To connect the Dual Trunk E1 Router to DC power:  
1. Place the unit on a flat surface or tray.  
2. Make sure the DC power source is off.  
3. Before you connect the unit to the centralized DC power source, strip 2 inches of jacket  
material off the tray cable and 1/2 inch of insulation off each wire.  
4. Connect the -48 V wire to the positive (+) terminal using a small flat screwdriver to  
fasten the wire.  
5. Connect the ground wire to the negative (-) terminal using the same method.  
The unit is designed to operate with negative voltage; therefore, the positive terminal is  
connected to ground.  
6. Connect a properly grounded third wire to the ground stud near the terminal block  
using a 1/4 inch wrench and fastening torque of 5 inch-pounds.  
7. To minimize disturbance to the wires through casual contact, secure the tray cable near  
the rack frame using multiple cable ties.  
Use at least four cable ties, a minimum of 4 inches apart. The first tie should be within 6  
inches of the terminal block.  
8. Connect the Dual Trunk E1 Router to a DC power source. Turn on power source.  
The LEDs on the front panel flash and status messages appear on the alphanumeric display as the  
Dual Trunk E1 Router runs the Self Test at power up.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
20  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Terminal Setup  
3
The Dual Trunk E1 Router can be operated using basic front panel controls, or through a more in-  
depth terminal interface. It is divided into two main sections listed below:  
Navigating the Front Panel  
Terminal Mode  
NAVIGATING THE FRONT PANEL  
From the front panel, you can:  
View and change configuration parameters  
Run diagnostic tests  
Monitor the Dual Trunk E1 Router status  
The front panel allows access to most of the configuration and monitoring features of the Dual  
Trunk E1 Router. You may find that for regular daily use, the front panel provides a quick and easy  
means of monitoring the status of your device and changing configuration parameters.  
The front panel is controlled using the front panel buttons: EXIT, UP arrow, DOWN arrow, and  
ENTER. For an explanation of each button’s function, see Table 3-1.  
Table 3-1 Button Usage  
Button  
Function  
Back/Exit Button  
Up/Back Button  
Down/Forward Button  
Enter Button  
Cancel an option or exit a menu  
Move backward through the options  
Move forward through the options  
Select an option  
The front panel and its buttons and LEDs are shown on page page 24. If you wish to disable these  
buttons, enable Protect Mode on Menu-4, Main Configuration using the terminal user interface. You  
will still be able to view the unit’s settings using the buttons, but you will not be able to change the  
settings.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8 9 j k l  
m
Figure 3-1  
Dual Trunk E1 Router Indications and Buttons  
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description  
#
8
9
j
Description  
Loopback LEDs  
Reserved  
Alphanumeric Display  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Back/Exit Button  
Up/Back Button  
Down/Forward Button  
Enter Button  
k
l
Reserved  
Reserved  
m
Reserved  
The LEDs for the Ethernet port are located in the back of the unit.  
22  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Front Panel Display  
The front panel alphanumeric display provides a 2-line, 16-character message. It provides access to  
the Dual Trunk E1 Router via the front panel buttons. Press the UP ARROW and the DOWN  
ARROW keys to move among the various menus. Using the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW  
keys will move you among the categories listed in Table 3-2.  
Table 3-2 Front Panel Categories  
Field  
Function  
EFS <XXX>%  
CONFIGURATION  
The percentage of time the E1 link has run without error.  
Access the Dual Trunk E1 Router’s basic configuration options, the unit’s serial number,  
and the current software version.  
TEST  
Run various diagnostics tests.  
MONITOR  
Track errors and system status parameters.  
Default Display  
EFS <XXX>%  
ALL LINKS  
NORMAL  
The EFS Field  
To reach the EFS (Error Free Seconds) statistic, press the EXIT Button repeatedly until the EFS  
category appears on the display. The EFS field presents the percentage of seconds in which no error  
occurred. The higher the percentage, the more stable the E1 connection.  
Error-free seconds are calculated using the following formula:  
GoodSeconds  
EFS = ------------------------------------  
TotalSeconds  
GoodSeconds = AllSeconds (BadSeconds + UnavailableSeconds)  
The Configuration Options  
To reach the Configurationoptions:  
1. Starting from the default display, press the UP or DOWN Arrow button to move among  
the fields until the CONFIGURATIONcategory appears on the display.  
2. Press the ENTER button to enter Configuration mode.  
UNIT CONFIG appears on the display.  
3. Press either the UP Arrow or the DOWN Arrow to move through the configuration  
options. The configuration options are presented in Table 3-3.To select a Configuration  
option, press the ENTER button.  
The display changes to reflect the first in the list of editable fields.  
4. Press the UP Arrow or the DOWN Arrow to move through the options in the  
CONFIGURATIONmenu until the feature you want to change is displayed.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
5. Press the ENTER button to enter edit mode for the selected feature.  
6. Use the UP Arrow and/or DOWN Arrow to change the field.  
7. Press the ENTER button to enter your change.  
8. Press the EXIT button to leave edit mode.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router Configuration Option  
The following table lists the configuration options.  
Table 3-3 Dual Trunk E1 Router Configuration Options  
Option  
Definition  
UNIT CONFIG  
Allows you to change the UNIT ID, the Date and Time, and the COMM Port  
Configuration. The options allow you to change:  
• Unit ID  
• Date and Time  
• COMM Port Configuration  
• Baud Rate  
• Parity Bits  
• Word Length  
• Stop Bits  
• Xoff/Xon  
• Test Length  
In addition, the UNIT CONFIG option displays the hardware revision, the  
software revision, and the serial number.  
IP CONFIG  
Allows you to view of configure your device for use within an IP network.  
• View the IP address of the COMM port (COMM IP ADD).  
• View the IP address of the NET port ( NET IP ADDRESS).  
• Configure the IP address for the Ethernet port ( ETHERNET IP AD.  
• Configure the IP mask (ETH IP MASK)  
The Test Options  
Tests can be run on the WAN ports. To conduct a test from the front panel:  
1. Press the UP Arrow button to move among the fields until the Testfield appears on the  
display.  
2. Press the ENTER button to enter test mode.  
SELF TESTappears on the display.  
3. Press either the UP Arrow or the DOWN Arrow to move through the test options until  
the desired test is displayed. The following tests are available:  
SELF TEST  
LOOP NET  
24  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
LOOP PAYLOAD  
LOOPUP REMOTE  
TEST PATTERN  
LOOPDOWN REMOTE  
LAMP TEST  
4. Press ENTER To select the test. Press ENTER again to run the test.  
Follow the display prompts to complete the test.  
To Stop a Test  
If you want to stop a running test, simultaneously press both the DOWN ARROW key and the UP  
ARROW key on your front panel.  
The Monitor Options  
The Monitorcategory provides a means of quickly monitoring the status of your network from the  
alphanumeric display. While many of the Monitoroptions are read only, counters can be cleared  
and reset to zero.  
To reach the Monitoroptions:  
1. Press the UP Arrow button to move among the categories until the Monitorcategory  
appears on the display.  
2. Press the ENTER button to enter Monitor mode.  
UNIT STATUS appears on the display.  
3. Press either the UP or DOWN Arrow to move through the monitoring options. The  
Monitoroptions are in Table 3-4.  
Table 3-4 Monitor Options  
Monitor Option  
UNIT STATUS  
NET STATUS  
Write Access  
Provides timing status. Read only.  
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF),  
NORMAL. Read only.  
PPP STATUS  
Provide status of the PPP link.  
MLPPP STATUS  
ETHERNET STATUS  
Provide status of the Multilink PPP link.  
Provide status of the Ethernet interface.  
TERMINAL USER INTERFACE MODE  
The front panel display provides miminal setup, configuration and verification menus. To fully  
configure your LRU4240 router you will need to access the Terminal User Interface (TUI) directly  
through the COMM port, or Telnet via the Ethernet port or the WAN ports.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Terminal Interface Navigation  
The terminal interface contains a number of menus which are used to configure, monitor, and  
manage the Dual Trunk E1 Router.  
To navigate the fields in the menus, use the arrow keys on your keypad.  
To select a menu, press the menu number as indicated at the bottom of the menu screen.  
To change a parameter, use the arrow keys to cycle through the available options and press  
Returnto select the highlighted option.  
Setting a Menu Parameter  
Use the following procedure to select a parameter, set it, and confirm your action:  
NOTE: You can also use the u(up), d (down), r(right), and l (left)  
keys in place of the arrow keys.  
1. Move the cursor to a field using the arrow keys, and press Return to activate edit  
mode.  
To change a parameter, use the arrow keys to cycle through the available options and press  
Returnto select the highlighted option. In other fields, you will be prompted for the required  
value. Enter the value, and press Return.  
Attaching the Dual Trunk E1 Router to your terminal  
Using Hyperterm to log on to the Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Configuring access rights  
ATTACHING TO A TERMINAL  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router can be attached via the COMM Port to the serial port of a server,  
computer, or terminal. You may need to attach your Dual Trunk E1 Router using the COMM Port  
on the rear of the device.  
Connect an RJ-45 to DE-9 COMM Port cable from the COMM Port on the Dual  
Trunk E1 Router to the COMM Port on your terminal.  
To communicate from an ASCII terminal to your device, use the COMM Port connector on  
the back panel of your Dual Trunk E1 Router (Figure 3-2).  
COMM Port  
Figure 3-2  
COMM Port on Dual Trunk E1 Router  
26  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Using the Ethernet port as management interface  
As an alternative to managing the Dual Trunk E1 Router via the COMM port, you can manage it  
directly using the Ethernet port (ENET). You can then Telnet into the device from any workstation  
in the network. This provides for both local and remote access.  
Using Terminal Software  
Once you have attached the Dual Trunk E1 Router to a terminal using one of the methods described  
above, you will need to use terminal emulation software to communicate with, and configure the  
device. You may use Hyperterm Windows, or the terminal emulation software of your choice. If  
using Hyperterm, follow the instructions outlined below to set up and run the program.  
Terminal Setup  
The COMM Port factory default settings on your device are defined as:  
Baud Rate — 38400  
Parity Bit — none  
Word Length — 8  
Stop Bits — 2  
Make sure that your terminal software is set to work with these parameters, or use the front panel to  
alter the default settings. Once you are logged in, the unit’s COMM port settings may be changed as  
shown in the section “Adjusting COMM Port Settings” on page 31. In addition, the following  
parameters should be set:  
Hardware Flow Control––none  
Terminal Emulation––VT-100  
Hyperterm Windows Setup  
Hypterterm is a Windows terminal emulation program that can be used to log on to the unit.  
1. Run Hypertrm.exe.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
2. Type a File Name, choose an icon then click OK.  
The name allows you to save the settings for future sessions and the icon represent the  
connection. You can put the icon on your desktop for easy access.  
The Connect To properties tab appears (Windows 98) or the Phone Number window appears  
(Windows 95)  
3. From the Connect Usingfield drop-down list, select  
Direct to COM1(or preferred COM port) then click OK. COM1 will be used for the  
rest of this procedure.  
The COM1 Properties box appears for PortSettings.  
28  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
4. Configure the settings for the COM1 Properties dialog box as shown below:  
Data bits per second –– 38,400  
Data bits –– 8  
Parity –– None  
Stop bits –– 2  
Flow control –– None  
After configuring the settings, click OK  
A blank screen with the cursor blinking appears.  
5. Go to the File pull-down and select Properties. At the properties Dialog box, Click the  
Settingstab.  
6. Set the following:  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
a. Emulation field to at VT-100  
b. Backscroll buffer lines to 500.  
Press Ok. You can now log on to the Dual Trunk E1 Router.  
Logging On from a Terminal  
To log on to the unit, you must first obtain the unit ID of the device. The unit ID is printed on a  
small sticker on the back or bottom of the device. You can also retrieve the unit ID via the UNIT  
CONFIG option of the front panel. For information on using the front panel, see “Navigating The  
New units have no password assigned. If you are logging in for the first time, you will not need to  
enter a password. Press return at the prompt and Menu 1, Main Status will appear. Systems with  
blank IDs are always logged on and cannot be logged off until a unit ID is assigned. For  
information on assigning an ID, refer to “Setting ID, Date, Time, and Network Timing” on page 34.  
The default ID is always a 6-character alphanumeric string that identifies the unit.  
If you wish to display or verify the unit ID, press Ctrl-xfive times to display all devices  
connected to the terminal.  
To log on to the Dual Trunk E1 Router:  
1. Press Ctrl-x, type the unit ID, and press Return.  
If password is enabled, the system prompts for a password.  
Now you need a password to log on:  
2. Type the Superuser or normal user password and press Return  
(For more information on normal and Superuser rights, see “Configuring Access Rights” on  
page 32).  
Menu-1, Main Status, appears.  
If this menu does not appear, you may have an incorrect ID, a faulty connection on the  
COMM Port, or an incorrect COMM Port configuration.  
3. Refer to Table 3-5 for Dual Trunk E1 Router messages during logon.  
Table 3-5 Login Prompts  
System Messages  
Action  
Condition  
The Terminal User Interface is  
already in use  
Please enter the Superuser  
password to force the other  
user to log off or press Ctrl-  
xand try again later.  
Normal user logged on via Telnet.  
Superuser is already logged into  
the Terminal User Interface. Try  
again later.  
Press Ctrl-xand try again  
later.  
Superuser logged on.  
30  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
NOTE: When accessing the unit via Telnet, the system forces you off after  
the fifth unsuccessful attempt to log on.  
Logging Off from a Terminal  
To log off, press Ctrl-x.  
The terminal stops responding to your keystrokes when you are logged off.  
Adjusting COMM Port Settings  
COMM port settings can be modified in the Dual Trunk E1 Router using Menu 8F - COMM Port  
Configuration.  
NOTE: It is possible to disrupt your terminal connection by changing these  
settings.  
The configurable settings are:  
Baud Rate  
Parity  
Word Length  
Stop bits  
Flow control  
DCD  
For more information on Menu 8F and available options, see the 4200 WAN Access Platform TUI  
Reference Guide.  
LOGGING ON FROM A TELNET CONNECTION  
To log on from a Telnet connection, use a terminal or terminal emulation program to access the unit  
directly.  
To log on to the unit user interface using a Telnet connection:  
1. Enter the Telnet COMMand and the Dual Trunk E1 Router IP address.  
Example of system response: MULTI is unit ID  
Current ID is MULTI  
MULTI password:  
If you do not have an ID, you may still log in. A “Sorry” or Logged Out” Message will  
appear. Press Ctrl-x to bring up a menu. Ctrl-x will not log you out until an ID is  
assigned.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
2. Enter the Normal User or Super User password.  
If you do not have a password, you may still connect. When connected, Menu 1 will appear.  
NOTE: If your Dual Trunk E1 Router is set for dial-up mode, that is, using a  
modem and directly dialing through a standard telephone connection, it is  
recommended that you DO NOT use a Telnet session to access the unit.  
CONFIGURING ACCESS RIGHTS  
You can create two access levels to the Dual Trunk E1 Router terminal interfaceSuperuser access  
rights and normal user access rightsby entering unique Superuser and normal user passwords in  
Menu 8C - Miscellaneous Management Configuration.  
Assigning User Passwords  
Since two access methods are available (using a terminal connected to the COMM Port or a Telnet  
connection from a remote terminal), you should exercise caution when assigning passwords.  
A “no passwords” situation gives any user logging on Superuser access rights. If this user sets only  
one password, both passwords become the same.  
When both passwords are the same, any user logging on with either password gains Superuser  
rights. As Superuser, the individual has exclusive control of the terminal interface.  
NOTE: You must set both passwords to prevent the above situations. Specify  
unique Superuser and Normal User passwords in Menu-8C.  
32  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Access Configuration  
4
OVERVIEW OF ACCESS CONFIGURATION  
This chapter contains information about configuring the LAN and WAN interfaces, the interface IP  
addresses, NMS IP addresses, Radius authentication, DHCP, and miscellanous management settings  
Table 4-1 Access configuration procedures  
Procedure  
Description  
Menu  
Reference  
Configuring LAN  
interface  
To set or modify the Ethernet data port IP address and subnet mask,  
and the ethernet speed (10MB/Half or 10MB/Full).  
Menu-0A  
Menu-0C  
Setting Unit ID, Date,  
Time, and E1 Network  
To configure the network E1 timing, framing, and coding.  
Menu-4A  
Menu-4B  
Allocating Timeslot for  
data and voice  
To allocate and map fractional dual E1 bandwidth to the Ethernet data Menu-6Z  
port  
Configuring WAN  
protocol  
To configure the WAN protocol to:  
• Single link PPP interface  
Menu-0A  
• Dual independent PPP link interfaces  
• Multilink PPP (MLPPP) interface  
• Single link Frame Relay interface  
• Dual links Frame Relay interfaces  
• Multilink Frame Relay (MFR) interface  
Configuring Frame Relay To configure statically the DLCI numbers with associated interface.  
DLCIs  
Menu-0E  
Menu-0F  
Menu-$IA  
Menu-0A  
Menu-8C  
Menu-8G  
Configuring Link  
Management Information  
To enable or disable LMI, and configure LMI settings, unit location  
UNIT-U or UNI-N  
Mapping DLCIs to IP  
addresses  
To configure the mapping of DLCI to the next hop IP addresses  
statically and manually.  
Configuring SLIP  
To configure SLIP (Serial Line Interface Protocol) to allow telnet  
access through the COMM port.  
Configuring Access  
Rights  
To set the TUI normal and superuser access levels.  
Configuring Radius  
Authentication  
To configure Radius authentication, user login and password,  
preventing unauthorized access and changes to the access router TUI.  
Enabling/Disabling Traffic To enable or disable the router from collecting and reporting RMON-1, Menu-0A  
Monitoring (Optional)  
and RMON-2 statistics.  
To enable or disable Frame Relay SLA and configure Frame Relay  
SLA statistics.  
Menu-0H  
By default Traffic monitoring is disabled.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 4-1 Access configuration procedures  
Procedure  
Description  
Menu  
Reference  
Configuring SNMP  
To configure SNMP “get”, “set, and” trap community” strings to  
prevent unauthorized SNMP management stations from gaining access  
to the router.  
Menu-0B  
Configure up to three Network Management Station (NMS) IP  
addresses that will receive SNMP trap to report alarms.  
Configuring Time and  
Date synchronization  
To configure RFC868 compliant time and date synchronization client. Menu-4T  
Configuring DHCP relay  
agent  
To configure DHCP server IP address and enable DHCP relay agent.  
Menu-$K  
34  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
CONFIGURING LAN INTERFACE  
Table 4-2 Configuring LAN interface  
Procedure  
Steps  
Setting Ethernet port speed  
To configure the ethernet speed to 10MB/Half or 10MB/Full.  
1.Select Menu-0C  
2.Select Data/Speed Mode  
3.Select 10MB/Half or 10MB/Full setting. The default value is  
10MB/Half.  
Modifying Ethernet port IP address  
1.Select Menu-0A  
2.Select ENET IP Address/Len field  
3.Enter the assigned Ethernet port IP Address and the subnet mask  
SETTING ID, DATE, TIME, AND NETWORK TIMING  
Unit ConfigurationMenu 4A  
Figure 4-1 shows Menu 4A Unit Configuration. The numbers in circles correspond to the  
procedures for setting the parameters in each field.  
2
1
3
Figure 4-1Menu 4A, Unit Configuration  
Table 4-3 Menu-4A- Unit Configuration  
Parameter  
UNIT ID  
Description  
Field Local 1 (Alphanumeric field identifier at the top of the menu)  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router comes factory configured with a unique unit ID. Each  
Dual Trunk E1 router in your network must have a unique Unit ID. You may use the  
preconfigured Unit ID or change it to a combination of 6 alpha and numeric  
characters, but the first character must be an alpha character.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Parameter  
DATE  
Description  
Dateor time 2  
To change date or time field, select the date or time field at the top of the screen by  
moving the cursor. Enter date and time as indicated by the prompt at the bottom of  
the screen.  
Example: 2/22/97yields 02/22/97and 22:4:6yields 22:04:06(The clock  
is a 24-hour clock.)  
UNIT  
Protect Mode - Enabled or Disabled (default);  
Enabled - Protect mode prevents you from running tests from the front panel.  
NETWORK  
TIMING  
Main/Alt Sync - INT, NET1, NET2  
Select the timing source for Main and for Alt Sync. The options INT, NET1, or  
NET2 for Main and Alt Sync.  
NET1 or NET2: Select this option if the network is the clock source.  
INT: Select this option if timing is derived from the internal oscillator in the unit.  
36  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Net Configuration and Status  
Table 4-4 Menu-4B- Net configuration and status  
Parameter  
Status  
Description  
Displays the network status.  
Framing  
Selects the network framing format from the following options:  
CRC4 enabled (the default), CRC4 disabled, and unstructured  
CONFIGURING TIMESLOT ALLOCATIONS  
Timeslot allocation menu is available for single and independent links applications, it is not  
available with multilink. The timeslot allocation menu-6Z lets you allocate fractional E1 bandwidth  
and map it to the Ethernet data port. With dual independent links the same selected timeslots will  
apply to both E1 links.  
Table 4-5 Menu-6Z, Timeslot configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
Allocation type  
Select the desired timeslot allocation method as Contiguous, Alternate, or  
Manual.  
Contiguous: To select a range of contiguous timeslots. Contiguous timeslots  
are always adjacent to each other and in numerical order. To configure  
contiguous timeslots, specify a valid range of timeslots. such as 17 to 25.  
Manual: Move to a timeslot one at a time, and assign a Data Port to it. This method  
allows any arbitrary timeslot allocation.  
Allocation type  
Allocate by port  
Select  
Allocate the selected timeslots for data, or set them to idle. Press the space bar then enter  
(IDLE, FRAC01 or to select: IDLE or FRAC01.  
AUX)  
IDLE - Selected timeslotes will be disabled.  
FRAC01 - Ethernet port  
Allocate by port  
TS01: Type in the starting timeslot  
starting and ending TS31: Type in the ending timeslot.  
timeslots  
If you configure timeslots in such a way that contradicts the definition of contiguous, the Dual Trunk E1  
Router will automatically set the contradicting timeslots to Idle  
Table 4-6 Timeslot allocation procedures  
Steps  
Procedure  
Allocating contiguous timeslots to  
data services  
1.Set allocation type to Contiguous  
2.Select FRAC01 port for Ethernet port in Allocate by Port  
3.Enter starting timeslot provided by your carrier  
4.Enter ending timeslot provided by your carrier  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 4-6 Timeslot allocation procedures  
Procedure  
Steps  
Disabling timeslots  
Example: setting timelost 1 through 8 to Idle  
1.Set allocation type to Contiguous  
2.Select Idle in Allocate by Port  
3.Enter starting Idle timeslot  
4.Enter ending Idle timeslot  
Allocating alternate timeslots  
Example: timeslot 7 through 17 for data  
1.Set allocation type to Alternate  
2.Select FRAC01 in Allocate by Port  
3.Enter 7 in starting timeslot  
4.Enter 17 for end timelot  
FRAC01 TS07 TS17 384 Kb/S appears in the Allocate by port fiel and  
timeslots 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, and 17 are allocated to Ethernet port, while all  
other timeslots are set automatically to idle.  
Allocating timeslots manually  
To manually allocate timeslots, move to the timeslot and specify the port.  
You must the other timeslots to Idle.  
Example: setting timeslots 3,7,9,14, and 15 to Ethernet port.  
1.Set allocation type to Manual  
2.Select timeslot 1 and set it to Idle  
3.Repeat step 2 to configure the other timeslots to Idle  
CONFIGURING WAN PROTOCOL  
The WAN protocol can be configured to Frame Relay, Multilink Frame Relay, PPP, or MLPPP.  
Configuring Single Link PPP Interface  
Table 4-7 Single PPP Link Configuration  
Procedure  
Steps  
1.Set Menu-0A- Traffic type field to PPP.  
Set router traffic type to PPP  
2.Set Menu-0A Multilink Protocol field to No.  
This disable multilink operation  
Set WAN port 1 IP address  
1.Set Menu-0A NET IP address and subnet mask  
Notice the menus will be configured for PPP operations. The bottom menu will display “6-PPP  
Cfg”.  
38  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Configuring independent PPP links Interfaces  
The PPP connection over the first T1/E1 port is assigned the interface port NET1. The second  
T1/E1 port is assigned the interface port NET2.  
Procedure  
Purpose  
Set router traffic type to PPP  
1.Set Menu-0A- Traffic type field to PPP.  
2.Set Menu-0A Multilink Protocol field to No.  
Set WAN port 1 IP address  
1.Set Menu-0A NET1 IP address and subnet mask  
Assign an IP address and subnet mask to the second T1/E1 link. This will  
be identified as NET1 link in all the menus.  
Set WAN port 2 IP address  
1.Set Menu-0A NET2 IP address and subnet mask  
Assign an IP address and subnet mask to the second T1/E1 link. This will  
be identified as NET2 link in all the menus  
Configuring MLPPP Interface  
Procedure  
Purpose  
Set router traffic type to MLPPP  
1.Set Menu-0A- Traffic type field to PPP.  
2.Set Menu-0A Multilink Protocol field to Yes  
The menus will be configured for MLPPP operations. The bottom menu  
will display “MLPPP Cfg”  
Set WAN bundle connection IP  
Address  
1.Set Menu-0A NET IP address and subnet mask  
Assign IP address and subnet mask to the bundle link associated to the  
bundled T1/E1 links. The bundle link is identified as Bundle0 link in all the  
menus.  
Configuring PPP Protocol Parameters  
Menu 6-A lets you configure the PPP or MLPPP protocol parameters:  
Table 4-8 Menu-6A PPP Configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
Keep alive timer  
Controls the messages of the keepalive (echo request) messages after the link(s)  
is(are) negotiated  
Keep alive timeout  
Retry Counter  
Controls how long an end point should wait for “ech response” after ending “echo  
request”  
How many unsuccessful “echo requests” should be attempted before a link is  
declared down  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Configuring single link Frame Relay  
Table 4-9 Configuring Single link Frame Relay  
Procedure  
Set router traffic type to Frame  
Relay  
1.Set Menu-0A- Traffic type field to Frame Relay.  
Set Menu-0A Multilink Protocol field to No  
Set WAN port 1 IP address  
1.Set Menu-0A NET1 IP address and subnet mask  
Configuring independent Frame Relay links  
Table 4-10 Configuring independent Frame Relay links  
Procedure  
Description  
Set router traffic type to Frame  
Relay  
1.Set Menu-0A- Traffic type field to Frame Relay.  
2.Set Menu-0A Multilink Protocol field to No  
Set WAN port 1 IP address  
Set WAN port 2 IP address  
1.Set Menu-0A NET1 IP address and subnet mask  
1.Set Menu-0A NET2 IP address and subnet mask  
Configuring Multilink Frame Relay  
Table 4-11 Configuring Multilink Frame Relay  
Procedure  
Description  
Set router traffic type to Frame  
Relay  
1.Set Menu-0A- Traffic type field to Frame Relay.  
2.Set Menu-0A Multilink Protocol field to Yes  
The menus will be configured for MLFR operations. The bottom menu will  
display “MLFR Cfg”  
Set WAN bundle connection IP  
Address  
1.Set Menu-0A NET1 IP address and subnet mask  
Assign IP address and subnet mask to the bundle link associated to the  
bundled T1/E1 links. The bundle link is identified as Bundle0 link in all the  
menus.  
Configuring Frame Relay DLCIs  
Dynamic configuration (LMI)  
With Link Management Interface (LMI) enabled on menu-0F, the Dual Trunk E1 Router will  
automatically discover the configured DLCIs on each of the WAN links.  
LMI protocol allows the router to learn the DLCIs from the frame relay switch network. The router  
will originate and terminate LMI requests and responses.  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router support the following three widely used versions of LMI protocol:  
ANSI T1.617 Annex D, referred as Annex D  
ITU Q.933 Annex A, referred as Annex A  
LMI Rev 1.0, referred as Revision 1.0  
40  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
LMI message types consist of:  
STATUS INQUIRY  
STATUS INQUIRY messages are used to request information on PVCs and their associated  
DLCIs. These Inquiries can be used to ask the receiving LMI-enabled device about all of the  
PVCs it knows about. Annex D also supports inquiries about individual DLCIs.  
STATUS  
STATUS messages are the replies to Status Inquiries.  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router supports both UNI-U and UNI-N  
Manual DLCI configuration  
You can enter the DLCIs manually in Menu-0E “Performance monitoring cofniguration”. Each  
DLCI is a sub-interface of a network port (NET1, NET2, or NET). For each DLCI you would enter  
the Committed Information Rate (CIR), and the remote far end network attached to the DLCI. The  
delay threshold parameter in the table is relevant only if RMON-1 performance monitoring is  
enabled.  
Mapping DLCIs to IP Addresses  
To send IP traffic on a DLCI interface requires address resolution to the next hop IP address. The  
mapping of of link layer addresses (DLCIs) to the next hop IP address can be done manually (static  
configuration) or automatically (dynamic configuration) using inverse ARP protocol (RFC2390).  
When a DLCI is discovered, the router sends an inverse ARP request to the remote router or edge  
router. The ARP response messages will trigger the updating of the DLCI to IP Map table.  
When a PVC is deleted the table entries associated to the deleted DLCI will are automatically  
removed. Entries learned through inverse ARP can be deleted manually from the table.  
Manual mapping of DLCIs to IP addresses can also be entered in the DLCI to IP Address table from  
Menu-$IA Frame Relay DLCI IP Map Table.  
NOTE: Physical layer loss of signal does not immediately trigger deletion of the dynamically learnt mappings. After loss  
of signal and failure of LMI retries, LMI status goes down and DLCIs get deleted. At this point mappings are also deleted  
(made inactive).  
CONFIGURING SLIP  
SLIP (Serial Line Interface Protocol) is a TCP/IP protocol that allows IP packets to be transmitted  
over the COMM port. This is configured using Menu 0A - Interface Configuration.  
Table 4-12 Configuring COMM port IP address  
Procedure  
Steps  
1.Set Menu-0A COMM IP address and subnet mask  
Set COMM Port IP address  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
CONFIGURING TUI ACCESS RIGHTS  
Table 4-13 Setting TUI access rights  
Procedure  
Steps  
1.Select menu-8C  
Setting normal user password  
2.Select Normal user password field  
3.Enter password, 10 characters maximum.  
A “no passwords” situation gives any user logging on Superuser access  
rights.  
By default the normal user password is the same for super user, if no  
password is set for super user.  
Setting super user password  
1.Select menu-8C  
2.Select Super user password field  
3.Enter password, 10 characters maximum  
If you do set a normal user password, you should set a unique super user  
password to prevent conflicts.  
CONFIGURING RADIUS AUTHENTICATION  
When a user telnets to the device, the Dual Trunk E1 Router prompts for user login and password,  
and sends the request to a designated primary radius server to authenticate the user access. If the  
server rejects access based on invalid user login or password, or if there is no response received  
from the server, the Dual Trunk E1 Router will send a ... message to the user and terminates the  
telnet session. Login failures are logged in the event log.  
If the primary server does not respond, after a configured number of retries, the unit can send the  
request to a designated secondary radius server.  
A super user can always bump any existing logged user.  
Table 4-14 Configuring Radius authentication  
Steps  
Procedure  
Setting Primary Radius server IP  
address  
1.Select Menu-8G  
2.Select Radius Primary Server IP address  
3.Enter Radius Primary Server IP address  
Setting Secondary Radius server IP  
address (Optional)  
1.Select Radius Backup Server IP address  
2.Enter Radius Backup Server IP address  
Enter authentication key with  
Radius Primary server  
1. Select Radius Primary Server Secret Key  
2.Enter authentication key  
Enter authentication key with  
Radius Backup server  
1. Select Radius Backup Server Secret Key  
2.Enter authentication key  
42  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 4-14 Configuring Radius authentication  
Procedure  
Steps  
Configure authentication retries  
1. Select Authentication Retries  
2.Enter retry count from 1 to 3  
If the primary server does not respond, after the configured number of  
retries, the router will send the request to the secondary Radius server.  
Configure authentication response  
timeout  
1. Select Authentication Response Timeout  
2.Enter count from 1 to 3  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENABLING/DISABLING TRAFFIC MONITORING  
Table 4-15 Enabing/ Disabling Traffic Monitoring  
Procedure  
Description  
Disabling Traffic monitoring  
1.Select Menu-0A  
2.Set Traffic Monitoring field to Disabled  
By default Traffic monitoring is Disabled.  
Enabling Traffic Monitoring  
1.Select Menu-0A  
2.Set Traffic Monitoring field to Enabled  
CONFIGURING SNMP.  
Table 4-16 Configuring Menu-0B SNMP  
Procedure  
Steps  
Setting get community string  
1.Select Community get field  
1.Enter an alphanumeric text string (max—32 characters). The  
default setting is public  
The router SNMP agent uses this text string to check GET requests for the  
SNMP configuration from the SNMP management station.  
Setting set community string  
1.Select Community set field  
1.Enter an alphanumeric text string (max—32 characters). The  
default setting is public.  
The router SNMP agent uses this text string to check SET requests from  
the SNMP management station to set the SNMP configuration.  
Setting trap community string  
Setting First NMS IP addresses  
1.Select Community trap field  
2.Enter an alphanumeric text string (max—32 characters). The default  
setting is public.  
The router SNMP agent inserts this string in SNMP traps it sends to the  
SNMP management stations.  
1.Select 1st NMS IP Address field  
2.Enter IP address. The router will send trap messages to this server.  
3.Select 1st Output Port field  
4.Selects the port (COMM, NET, or Ethernet) over which the router will  
send trap to the 1st NMS IP address. Default port is COMM.  
Setting second NMS IP addresses  
1.Select 2nd NMS IP Address field  
2.Enter IP address. The router will send trap messages to this server.  
3.Select 2nd Output Port field  
4.Selects the port (COMM, NET, or Ethernet) over which the router will  
send trap to the 1st NMS IP address.Default port is COMM.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 4-16 Configuring Menu-0B SNMP  
Procedure  
Steps  
Setting Third NMS IP addresses  
1.Select 3rd NMS IP Address field  
1.Enter IP address. The router will send trap messages to this  
server.  
2.Select 3rd Output Port field  
3.Selects the port (COMM, NET, or Ethernet) over which the router will  
send trap to the 1st NMS IP address. Default port is COMM..  
CONFIGURING TIME AND DATE SYNCHRONIZATION  
Table 4-17 Configuring Time and Date Synchronization  
Procedure  
Steps  
1.Select Menu-  
Setting Time server synchronization  
2.Set Days, Hours, and Minutes frequency  
Configuring Primary Time Server IP  
Addresse  
1.Select Time Src Primary IP Address field  
2.Enter Time Server Primary IP address  
3.Select physical port of which Time Server is connected to. ENET, ot  
NET.  
Configuring Secondary Time Server  
IP Addresse  
1.Select Time Src Secondary IP Address field  
2.Enter Time Server Primary IP address  
The router accesses both the primary and secondary time servers from the  
same port.  
Enable Time Synchonization  
1.Select Automatic Sync field and set it to Enabled.  
The router Time Client will start synchronizing time and date with the  
designated Time Server.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
CONFIGURING DHCP  
Table 4-18 Configuring DHCP  
Procedure  
Steps  
Setting DHCP Server IP address  
1.Select Menu-$K  
2.Select DHCP server field  
3.Enter DHCP Server IP address.  
Enabling DHCP Relay agent  
1.Select Menu-$K  
2.Select DHCP Relay field  
3.Set it to Enable to DHCP relay agent.  
46  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Bridging Configuration  
5
OVERVIEW OF THE CONFIGURATION  
The LRU4240 supports bridging and routing packet processing modes. This chapter contains  
procedures on configuring your device for layer 2 bridging applications.  
Bridging provides the capability to connect two or more physically separate LAN segments over the  
WAN, to create a single logical LAN. Bridging occurs at layer 2 and uses the MAC address  
assigned to each LAN device, to either forward or filter frames. Routing forwards IP packets  
between two or more IP networks.  
NOTE: With the availability of Bridging mode, the proprietary IP Fast Forwarding mode available in the menu will no  
longer be supported in the future, and is thereore not documented...  
Table 5-1 Bridging configuration procedure  
Procedure  
Description  
Menu  
Reference  
Setting bridging mode  
To configure the unit for Bridging or VLAN Bridging. Menu-$A  
In bridging mode, all traffic types including IP is  
bridged.  
Configuring static MAC  
Bridge routes  
To map statically up to 50 MAC addresses to specific Menu -$GA page 50  
ports in the MAC to port map table. The entries will be  
stored in non-volatile RAM (NVRAM) and are  
restored at boot time.  
Displaying MAC to port  
map table  
To display the MAC to port map table. View both  
learnt and static MC to port mapping entries.  
Menu -$GB page 51  
BRIDGING CONFIGURATION  
Bridging operates at layer 2 of the OSI model to bridge Ethernet traffic between the LAN and the  
WAN and requires little configuration. All traffic types including IP is bridged. The bridge learns  
which addresses lay on each side of the bridge and maintains the following information in a MAC  
to port map table:  
MAC address  
Physical interface (Ethernet or Network ports)  
DLCI, in Frame Relay mode  
The MAC to port map table is used by the bridge in its forwarding decisions.  
On a Frame Relay connection, using InverseARP, the bridge discovers the remote subnets connected  
on each DLCI and fills the remote end router’s MAC address and the DLCI on which it was  
discovered.  
On the LAN side as packets flow on the Ethernet, the bridge learns which hosts resides on the local  
LAN by storing the source host address in its MAC to port table.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Whenever a packet destined to a particular MAC address is received, the MAC port map table is  
consulted, if an entry exists then that packet is transmitted or forwarded on that port. If there are no  
entry and the packet is received on the Ethernet port, it is forwarded on all the network ports.  
Incoming packets from the network ports are forwarded over the Ethernet port.  
NOTE: Current software release does not implement Spanning Tree algorithm to control and eliminate bridging loops.  
You will need to avoid bridging loops in your network topology.  
Managing the unit in Bridging mode  
In bridging mode the unit’s Ethernet port IP address is considered the unit IP address, it is the only  
valid IP address. IP traffic coming from the LAN or the WAN with the destination IP address set to  
the unit IP address will be processed by the unit as management traffic.  
VLAN Forwarding support  
The bridge forwards VLAN tagged frames transparently between the LAN and the WAN interfaces.  
If the unit ”Management VLAN ID” is set to disabled, IP packets with the destination IP address  
matching the unit IP address will be considered as management traffic regardless of the frame’s  
VLAN ID value.  
Management VLAN ID  
To manage the unit with specific VLAN setting, you will need to set the unit “Management VLAN  
ID” and “Management VLAN priority” from menu-$A or using the command line interface.  
In this case, management traffic is identified by matching the VLAN ID with the unit’s  
Management VLAN ID, and the destination MAC address with the Ethernet port MAC address, or  
the destination IP address with the unit’s port IP address.  
Bridging Application Examples  
WAN Gateway for IP VPN Application  
Connect to your IP VPN over fractional to full E1 circuit using PPP or Frame Relay. For higher  
bandwidth bond the two E1 links using MLFR or MLPPP, provided your Service Provider supports  
Multilink Frame Relay or MLPPP services.  
The external VPN appliance connected to your LRU4240 initiates and terminates tunnels. The  
LRU4240 functions as a gateway to your WAN and transfers IP packets at E1 or dual E1 wirespeed.  
Point-to-point LAN Extension  
Connect two remote LANs over fractional to full E1 circuits transparently using PPP, or Frame  
Relay on a single DLCI. For higher bandwidth bond the two E1 links using MLPPP or MLFR on  
Menu-0A.  
Multipoint Bridge example  
Connect multiple remote LANs over a Frame Relay network. For higher bandwidth bond the two  
T1/E1 links using MLFR, provided your Service Provider supports Multilink Frame Relay services.  
48  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
For VLAN applications, a VLAN switch is required for VLAN tagging. The LRU 4240 forwards  
VLAN tags transparently but does not perform any VLAN tagging.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Configuring Bridging  
Table 5-2 Configuring Bridging packet processing mode  
Procedure  
Description  
Setting Bridging over  
Frame Relay or Multilink  
Frame Relay  
1.Select Menu-0A  
2.Set Traffic Type to Frame Relay  
Encapsulation of bridged frames is RFC2427 compliant.  
In multilink mode, the frame header is prefixed with a Multilink Frame Relay  
header  
1.Select Menu-$A  
2.Set Packet Processing Mode to Bridging.  
Packets received from the WAN are automatically forwarded to the Ethernet port  
In bridging mode Menu $ will be reduced to the following menu selections:  
A.Unit Routing Configuration  
F. Ethernet ARP Table  
G. Mac Bridge  
Setting Bridging over  
PPP or MLPPP  
1.Select Menu-0A  
2.Set Traffic Type to PPP  
1.Select Menu-$A  
2.Set Packet Processing Mode to Bridging.  
Packets received from the WAN are automatically forwarded to the Ethernet port  
In bridging mode Menu $ will be reduced to the following menu selections:  
A.Unit Routing Configuration  
F. Ethernet ARP Table  
G. Mac Bridge  
Enabling Promiscuous  
mode  
By default in Bridging mode the unit is configured with promiscuous mode enabled.  
This mode allows the unit to receive all packets from the LAN network.  
Setting bridging route  
aging time  
Entries in the MAC bridge table are removed automatically when they are inactive  
for period of time defined as “Bridge Route Aging Time”. By default the aging time  
is 300 seconds and can be set to up to 1,000,000 seconds. To change the default:  
1.Select Menu-$A  
2.Set Bridge Route Aging Time in seconds  
The setting will take effect immediately.  
Configuring static MAC Bridge Routes  
Enter up to 50 entries in the MAC to port map table. The entries will be stored in non-volatile RAM (NVRAM)  
50  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
and are restored at boot time  
Table 5-3 Configuring MAC Static routes  
Procedure  
Steps  
1.Select Menu-$GA  
Adding a static MAC  
bridge entry  
2.Select the MAC Address field of an inactive entry  
3.Enter the MAC address of the host  
4.Select the Interface field  
5.Set the Interface field to the physical port NET-1, NET-2, or ENET-0  
This identifies the physical WAN or LAN port on which to bridge the MAC  
address.  
6.Select the DLCI  
This identifies the logical DLCI on which to bridge the MAC address.  
7.Set the Action field to Add  
Deleting a static a static  
router  
1.Select the Action field of the entry you want to delete.  
2.Set the Action field to Delete and press Enter.  
Displaying MAC to Port Map Table  
The MAC to port MAP table maintains the learnt entries and the static entries . The entries learned  
are in active state, aged entries are removed from the table automatically. For each entry the menu  
displays:  
MAC address  
Interface: Enet-0 for Ethernet, NET1, NET2 for network interfaces  
DLCI for Frame Relay connection  
Entry type: Learned for entries learned dynamically; Static for entries entered manually from  
menu Menu-$GA; Self the unit’s Ethernet port MAC address  
Table 5-4 Displaying MAC to Port Map table  
Procedure  
Steps  
Displaying all MAC to  
1.Select Menu-$GB  
port entries  
2.Type a for all  
The menu will display all entries in the MAC to port Map table.  
Type n to view next page  
Type p to view previous page  
Displaying static only  
1.Select Menu-$GB  
MAC to port entries  
2.Type s for static  
3.The menu will display all entries in the MAC to port Map table  
Type n to view next page  
Type p to view previous page  
Figure 5-1  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Configuring the Firewall  
For instructions on setting the firewall refer to “Configuring the Firewall” on page 61.  
52  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Routing Configuration  
6
OVERVIEW OF THE CONFIGURATION  
This chapter contains procedures on configuring routing protocols and Network Address  
Translation. Routing operates at layer 3, uses destination IP addresses and routing table decisions to  
forward packets to the next hop address..  
Table 6-1 Router configuration procedures  
Procedure  
Description  
Menu  
Reference  
Setting Routing mode  
To configure the router to routing mode. In this mode  
packets will be routed to next hop address based on  
static and dynamic route tables.  
Menu-$A  
Setting default gateway  
Configuring static routes  
To specify the default router or next hop where the  
packet will be forwarded if no routes are found.  
Menu-$A  
Menu-$C  
Menu-$E  
To add, modify, or delete static routes that map  
destination IP addresses to next hop IP addresses.  
Configuring Dynamic  
Routing  
To configure RIP1, RIP2, and OSPF dynamic routing  
protocols through the router CLI.  
Configuring load  
balancing with  
independent links  
if more than one route exist to a particular destination, Menu-$C  
the routing engine will distribute packets equally  
among the routes with equal cost  
Configuring NAT  
To configure static NAT, dynamic NAT, and  
overloading.  
Menu-$J  
To enable NAT for single network link connection to an Menu-$JC  
ISP for internet access.  
To enable NAT for dual network network links  
connection to two different ISPs. access.  
Menu-$JC  
Configuring NAT for  
To enable internet access through central site for  
Menu-$JC  
Internet access and Frame remote enterprise networks (Internet backhauling). on a  
Relay network Frame Relay network.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
CONFIGURING ROUTING MODE  
Table 6-2 Configuring routing mode  
Procedure  
Steps  
1.Select Menu-$A  
Setting routing mode  
2.Set Packet Processing Mode to Routing  
Routing mode is global and applies to all supported interfaces.  
CONFIGURING DEFAULT GATEWAY  
Table 6-3 Configuring default gateway  
Procedure  
Steps  
1.Select Menu-$A  
Setting default Gateway  
IP Address  
2.Select Default Gateway IP Address field  
3.Set IP Address  
Enabling default gateway  
1.Select Menu-$A  
2.Set Default Gateway to Enabled  
54  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
CONFIGURING STATIC ROUTES  
Static routes lets you define a route that maps the destination IP address received in a datagram to  
an egress port or a next hop IP address. A subnet mask is also configured to specify which portion  
of the destination IP address is the destination network address portion  
6
1
2
4
5
3
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
.
Table 6-4 Configuring static routes  
Procedure  
Steps  
Adding a static route  
1.Select the Destination IP field of an inactive route  
2.Edit the IP address  
3.Select the Len field  
4.Enter the subnet mask value of the destination network. Value 0 to32.  
The subnet mask is determined by the number of 1’s left justified in a 32-bit  
submask field, with the rest of the field set to zeros. The subnet mask  
describes how many bits in the destination IP network address are valid, and  
are to be matched against incoming packet’s destination address.  
5.Select the Next Hop IP field 2 or select the Interface field 3 to enter either the IP  
address for routers on numbered interfaces or to enter the egress port.  
Enter the IP address for routers on numbered interfaces (Ethernet).  
This is the IP address of the router where incoming matching destination IP  
packets are sent. This IP address must be on the same subnet as one of the  
numbered ports.  
Or  
Set the egress port to either NET1, NET2, ENET-0, Bundle0. This identifies  
the physical WAN or LAN port associated to the route.  
6.Set the Metric field 4  
The metric specifies the route cost. Enter a number between 1 and 255 to  
define the hop count. Use this count to create preferential hops for prioritizing  
routing entries.  
If more than one route of equal cost is found for a particular destination, the  
routing engine will distribute the packets equally among the available routes  
using a round-robin algorithm. See “Setting the Metric parameter for Load  
Balancing” below.  
If multiple routes are found with unequal costs then the route with lesser cost  
metric is chosen.  
7.Set the Action field 5 to Add  
If this new route is accepted by the routing engine the status field 6will change  
from Inactive to Active.  
If the route is not accepted, the action field 5 will change to Modify. You will  
have to change one of the settings in the route and try to add it again.  
56  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 6-4 Configuring static routes  
Procedure  
Steps  
Modifying a static router  
1.Select the Action field of the route you want to modify.  
2.Select Modify  
The status of the first column will change to Inactive. You can now select and  
change any parameter of the selected static route.  
3.Modify the destination IP field 1.  
4.Modify the Next Hop IP field 2 or Modify the Interface field 3.  
5.Modify the Metric field 4  
6.Set the Action field 5 to Add and press Enter.  
If the modified route is accepted by the routing engine, the status field 6 will change  
from Inactive to Active.  
If the modified route is not accepted, the action field 5 will change to Modify. You  
will have to change one of the settings in the route and try to add it again.  
Deleting a static route  
1.Select the Action field 5 of the route you want to delete.  
1.Select Delete command  
The status of the first column will change to Inactive and the action field will be set  
to Delete.  
Load balancing over independent links  
To load balance traffic between two E1 links to a remote network, you will need to set two routes  
with equal cost. Both routes will have the same destination network and different interface (NET1,  
NET2).  
CONFIGURING DYNAMIC ROUTING  
The dynamic routing protocols RIP1, RIP2, and OSPF are configured using the command line  
interface accessible from Menu-$E. The router CLI commands and parameters are documented in  
appendix E.  
NOTE: Standard LRU4240 includes RIP1, RIP2, and OSPF dynamic routing. BGP-4 protocol is available as an optional  
dynamic routing protocol.  
CONFIGURING NAT  
NAT allows the use of private IP addresses when accessing the Internet. Any host with unregistered  
IP address must use NAT to communicate with the rest of the world. This service is transparent to  
the internal local hosts.  
In this documentation “Local” refers to unregistered IP addresses and “Global” refers to registered  
IP addresses.  
NAT bindings can be done statically, where a given local host may always map to a given global  
address, or dynamically where the router assigns to the local host accessing the internet a global  
address from the pool addresses given by the ISP.  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router supports the following NAT features:  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Static NAT - To map a unregistered IP address to a registered IP address. This is useful to enable  
outside hosts to access an internal IP host of server.  
Dynamic NAT - To share dynamically a range of global addresses among internal hosts to access  
the internet. Translation occurs when traffic takes place.  
Overloading - If the number of global addresses available is less than number of hosts which  
need to access internet at the same time, then the port field also can be used for translation.  
Unregistered IP addresses are mapped to one or many registered IP addresses.  
NAT Configuration menus  
NAT is configurable through the TUI menu $J accessible direcly or remotely via Telnet.  
Table 6-5 NAT configuration menus  
Menu  
Description  
Menu-$JA Global Map table  
Select Add command  
Menu-$JB NAT static table  
To configure the global IP address ranges to allocate through NAT.  
Add the global IP addresses to NAT.  
To configure the one-to-one mapping of global IP addresses to local IP  
addresses.  
Menu-$C-Local address table  
To configure the networks that require NAT translation. If the table is empty  
no NAT translation will take place.  
NAT will translate if the packet source or destination IP address is included  
in the Local table.  
NAT will not translate if both the packet source AND the destination IP  
addresses are included in the local table. This is useful for network scenarios  
where filtering NAT, based on source and destination addres, is required.  
Menu-$JE NAT Interface  
configuration  
To enable or disable NAT and NAPT per WAN interface.  
Menu-$JF NAT Dynamic entries To verify dynamic operations. You can view the dynamic alloction of global  
IP addresses to local host as traffic takes place.  
58  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Configuring NAT for single link ISP  
Use the following procedure to configure your Dual Trunk E1 Router with dynamic NAT for  
internet access to a single ISP  
Table 6-6 Configuring NAT with single link ISP  
Procedure  
Steps  
Setting single link NAT  
ISP to NET1  
Example: You were assigned 14 global IP addresses starting from 100.120.30.02 by  
your ISP for NET1  
1.Select menu-$JAGlobal Map Table  
2.Select Translated IP address field.  
3.Enter 100.120.30.02 as the starting global IP address  
4.Select subnet mask  
5.Enter 28.  
6.Set the interface field to NET1  
Select the interface on which the network is connected to the ISP.  
With 4230 Access Router select NET1.  
With 4240 Dual Link Router select either NET1, NET2, or Bundle0  
7.Set Action field to Add  
Enter local networks that  
require NAT translation  
1.Select Menu-$JC  
Add a row entry in this table for each network you want enable internet access.  
2.Select local IP address field of an inactive entry (field set to Delete)  
3.Enter the IP address that will be translated  
4.Set subnet mask field of the translated network  
5.Select interface field  
6.Select the connection the translated network is connected to.  
Enet0 for directly attached network  
NET1, NET2 or Bndl0 for remotely attached network via WAN port.  
Optional - Enable  
overloading  
If you want to share a single global IP address or a range of global IP addresses  
among multiple host.  
1.Select menu-$JE  
2.Set NAPT field to Enabled on the global interface (the network interface through  
which the global networks can be reached, NET1 in this example)  
Enable dynamic NAT  
1.Select menu-$JE  
2.Select unit NAT field and set it to enabled  
3.Select the global network interface (NET1 in this example) NAT field and set it  
to Enabled  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Single link Internet Example  
In this typical branch office configuration, a single global IP address is shared by multiple hosts  
when accessing the internet via the 4230 single T1/E1 .  
Figure 6-1  
NAT single link application example  
Table 6-7 Single link Internet Access configuration  
Steps  
Procedure  
Setting single link NAT ISP to  
NET1  
1.Select menu-$JAGlobal Map Table  
2.Set Translated IP address field to 100.120.30.02  
3.Set subnet mask to 32  
4.Set the interface field to NET1  
5.Set Action field to Add  
Enter local networks that  
require NAT translation  
1.Select Menu-$JC  
2.Select the first row in the table  
3.Set Local IF IP Address field to 172.17.1.0. This is the subnet that will be  
translated when accessing the internet  
4.Set subnet mask field to 24. Assuming the network id is 172.17.1  
5.Set Interface field to Enet0  
6.Select the connection the translated network is connected to.  
Enet0 for directly attached network  
Enable dynamic NAT and  
overloading  
To share the single global IP address among the multiple hosts.  
1.Select menu-$JE  
2.Select the NET1 row in the table  
3.Set NAT field to Enabled  
4.Set NAPT field to Enabled  
5.Set Two Way NAT to Disabled . (Default setting)  
Note: Leave all the fields for both ENET row and NET2 to disabled  
Configuring NAT for Multihoming  
Use the following procedure to configure your Dual Trunk E1 Router for multihoming, internet  
access to two ISPs simultaneously. In the example we’ll configure:  
60  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
NET1 to ISP1 with single global IP address 120.20.30.10  
NET2 to ISP2 with 4 global IP address starting from 200.80.100.21.  
Table 6-8 Configuring NAT for Multihoming  
Procedure  
Steps  
Setting ISP1 link  
1.Select menu-$JAGlobal Map Table  
2.Select Translated IP address field.  
3.Enter 120.20.30.10 as the starting global IP address  
4.Set subnet mask to 32  
5.Set the interface field to NET1.  
6.Set Action field to Add  
Enter local networks that  
require NAT translation  
on NET1  
1.Select Menu-$JC  
Add a row entry in this table for each network you want enable internet access.  
2.Select local IP address field of an inactive entry (field set to Delete)  
3.Enter the IP address that will be translated  
4.Set subnet mask field of the translated network  
5.Set interface to NET1  
Setting ISP2 link  
1.Select menu-$JAGlobal Map Table  
2.Select Translated IP Address field.  
3.Enter 200.80.100.21 as the starting global IP address  
4.Set subnet mask to 30.  
This will allocate addresses: 200.80.100.21 through 24  
5.Set the interface field to NET2.  
6.Set Action field to Add  
Enter local networks that  
require NAT translation  
on NET2  
1.Select Menu-$JC  
Add a row entry in this table for each network you want enable internet access.  
2.Select local IP address field of an inactive entry (field set to Delete)  
3.Enter the IP address that will be translated  
4.Set subnet mask field of the translated network  
5.Set interface to NET2  
Configuring NAT for Internet access and Frame Relay network  
In the example below the enterprise frame relay network central site provides internet access for all  
the remote enterprise networks. A single DLCI (200) will be set for Internet access. The central site  
router will be configured to:  
Disable NAT on intranet traffic. IP traffic between central site networks and remote branch  
networks will take place without any NAT translation. This will enhance the router  
performances.  
Enable NAT on internet access. NAT translation will take place on any internet traffic from  
central network or remote networks.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 6-9 Configuring bundled internet access and Frame Relay network  
Procedure  
Steps  
Setting ISP1 link  
1.Select menu-$JAGlobal Map Table  
2.Select Translated IP address field.  
3.Enter 120.20.30.10 as the starting global IP address  
4.Set subnet mask to 32  
5.Set the interface field to NET1.  
6.Set Action field to Add  
Enter the central site and  
remote network  
1.Select Menu-$JC  
Add a row entry in this table for each network you want enable internet access.  
2.Select local IP address field of an inactive entry (field set to Delete)  
3.Enter the IP address that will be translated  
4.Set subnet mask field of the translated network  
5.Set interface to NET1  
62  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Firewall Configuration  
7
The Firewall table is an access list that filters packets by denying or permitting access from source  
hosts to destination hosts. The rules are applied according to the order set in each entry in the list.  
The first match determines whether or not the packet is accepted or denied by the router. If a packet  
passes a first match and is not denied access, subsequent rules are applied on the packet. The default  
access setting is to deny all access.  
..  
Table 7-1 Router configuration procedures  
Procedure  
Description  
Menu  
Reference  
Configuring Firewall  
The Firewall table lets you set an access list of up to  
150 entries to permit or deny access based on the  
source or destination IP addresses.  
Menu-$H  
The default Firewall setting is to deny all access.  
CONFIGURING THE FIREWALL  
You need to enable first the Firewall on menu $A, before you activate entries in the Firewall table.  
6
5
1
3
2
4
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
To add an entry to the access list:  
Table 7-2 Configuring Firewall  
Procedure  
Steps  
Adding or modifying an  
entry  
1.Select the Ord field 1 of an inactive route line.  
2.Enter an order number between 0 and 511.  
The firewall uses a rule based order of execution. This identifies the order of  
execution of the entry in the firewall table.  
3.Set the Action field 2 to either Deny or Permit.  
4.Enter in the Src Address/Len field 3 the IP address and subnet mask of the  
host you want to permit or deny access from.  
5.Enter in the Dest Address/Len field 4 the IP address and subnet mask of  
the host you want to permit or deny access to.  
6.Set the SrcIntf field 5 to PPP1, PPP2, or ENET-0.  
Src Interface specifies the interface on which the packet was received.  
7.Set the Status field 6 to Active  
8.Save and activate the entry by pressing k  
Entries in the list will be ordered according to the order and the pairs of source and  
destination.  
Deleting or deactivating  
an entry  
1.Select the Status field 6 of the selected active route.  
2.Set the Status field to Inactive  
64  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Diagnostics  
8
The Dual Trunk E1 Router offers extensive diagnostic capabilities for local and remote analysis.  
These include fixed test patterns and two user-programmable 24-bit test patterns. In addition to  
front panel LEDs, the Dual Trunk E1 Router features more than a dozen user-configurable  
parameters and performance thresholds for remote alarm reporting.  
REQUIRED TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT  
Obtain the following tools and equipment when performing the procedure(s) to isolate the Dual  
Trunk E1 Router from the network:  
A standard E1 test set, such as a FIREBERD 6000 or equivalent with a E1 Interface and cables.  
An RJ-48 plug connector with two patch cords for connecting to the E1 test set.  
Protocol analyzer or FIREBERD 500 to capture and analyze PPP protocol layer. Third party  
software protocol analyzer tools on PC to use as standard data test set, to capture packets on the  
Ethernet layer such as EtherPick, or Snoop command on Unix.  
Hand tools for attaching and removing cables.  
If you do not have any test equipment, you must rely on the network to do most of the  
troubleshooting for you.  
PERFORMING TESTS FROM THE FRONT PANEL  
Using the arrow keys on the front panel, you can perform the following tests. For more information  
on front panel controls, see Chapter 3, Terminal Setup.”  
Self Test  
Loopback Tests  
Pattern Tests  
Lamp Test  
Self Test  
The Self Test checks the unit’s electronic components and performs a signal path check of transmit  
and receive directions simulating a 4000-ft E1 line.  
The messages are RUNNING SELFTEST, SelfTest Successful, or one of the error  
messages listed in Table 8-1.  
Table 8-1 Self Test Indicators  
Indicators  
Description  
Flash Code Error  
CRC of flash copy of executing code failed.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 8-1 Self Test Indicators  
Indicators  
Description  
DRAM CRC Error  
Flash Boot Error  
Flash Loader Error  
Net Error  
CRC of RAM copy of executing code failed.  
CRC of flash boot code failed.  
CRC of flash factory loader failed.  
Pattern test failed.  
Flash Write Error  
Flash write test failed.  
Loopback Tests  
You can isolate sections of the Dual Trunk E1 Router to determine if it is defective. The problem is  
normally in the network.  
This section describes each of the loopback tests you can perform from the Dual Trunk E1 Router’s  
front panel. The tests are:  
Loop NET 1/2  
Loop Payload  
Loop Up Remote and Loop Down Remote  
NOTE: No test is 100% complete and a small portion of the network will remain  
untested. Your unit may allow only one active loopback at a time.  
NOTE: In the figures that illustrate the available tests, the path for only one Port  
(Link) is shown, to prevent overly confusing drawings. If the test is also being run on  
the second port, its path will be similar to that shown in the figure.  
Loop NET Test  
The Loop NET test, illustrated in Figure 8-1, verifies the operation of the E1 network and is  
available only on full bandwidth.  
This test loops the data received from the network back to the network. The data is regenerated  
before it is looped back; however, the unit does not perform additional processing of the data. This  
minimizes the impact of the unit during the test so that network problems can be isolated.  
This test can loop Net1, Net2, and All Nets.  
66  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
LOCAL  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
REMOTE  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
CSU  
DSU  
E1  
DSU  
CSU  
Network  
Interface  
WAN  
Data  
Port  
Network  
Interface  
E1  
Figure 8-1  
Loop NET Test  
Loop Payload Test  
The Loop Payload test verifies proper operation of the unit and the network.  
This test loops the payload data received from the network back toward the network. Before it is  
looped back, the data is regenerated and a new framing pattern is inserted. Thus, the proper E1  
framing of the Dual Trunk E1 Router and network can be verified.  
This test can loop Net1, Net2, and All Nets.  
Loop Up Remote and Loop Down Remote Tests  
The Loop Up/Down Remote test, illustrated in Figure 8-2 on page 8-68, places the remote unit into  
Network Loopback using the industry standard set codes. Once in Network Loopback, test patterns  
can be sent to verify the Bit Error Rate (BER) performance of the bi-directional E1 network signal.  
To place the remote unit into network loopback, the local Dual Trunk E1 Router continuously  
transmits the industry standard loop up code to the remote unit. If the remote unit does not go into  
network loopback within 15 seconds a failure is declared and the Dual Trunk E1 Router stops  
sending the loop up code.  
The loop code and network parameters for the local and remote units must match.  
Use the Loop Down Remote test to terminate the remote loopback. This test can be used no matter  
how the remote unit was put into loopback.  
Perform the Loop Up Remote and Loop Down Remote tests from the front panel, user interface or  
SNMP.  
This test can loop Net1 and Net2, but not All Nets.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
LOOP UP REMOTE  
LOCAL  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
REMOTE  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
DSU CSU  
DSU  
CSU  
E1  
Network  
Interface  
Data  
Port  
Network  
Interface  
WAN  
Data  
Port  
E1  
LOOP DOWN REMOTE  
LOCAL  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
REMOTE  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
DSU CSU  
DSU  
CSU  
E1  
Data  
Port  
Network  
Data  
Interface  
Port  
WAN  
Network  
Interface  
E1  
Figure 8-2  
Loop Up/Down Remote Test  
NOTE: The full bandwidth loop up code puts the remote Dual Trunk E1  
Router in a full bandwidth network loopback.  
Pattern Tests  
QRW Pattern Test  
Use the Quasi-Random Word (QRW) test to measure Bit Error Rates on the network. The Dual  
Trunk E1 Router sends a QRW pattern into the network and monitors the received E1 network  
signal for QRW bit errors. QRW is a good approximation of actual user data. It is also known in the  
industry as Quasi Random Signal State (QRSS).  
This test also looks for bit errors in both E1 circuit directions when the remote system is looped up.  
In this case, the system transmits the QRW to the E1 network; the remote system loops it back to  
the Dual Trunk E1 Router which monitors the signal for errors.  
You can also use the QRW code to isolate a E1 network problem to a specific transmission  
direction. In this case, both E1 transmission directions are monitored when the local and the remote  
system transmit QRW (the remote is not put into loopback).  
Other Pattern Tests  
Other pattern tests types are listed and described in Table 8-2.  
Table 8-2 Send Test Types Descriptions  
Send Test Type  
1:7 Pattern  
1:1  
Pattern Test Description  
Stresses the timing recovery circuits of repeaters and other intermediate equipment.  
Sends alternate ones and zeros—used to test for bridge taps.  
Used for signal power measurements.  
All Ones  
68  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 8-2 Send Test Types Descriptions  
Send Test Type  
All Zeros  
Pattern Test Description  
Used for verification of B8ZS.  
1:4 (or Alternate)  
The 1:4 code is the loopup remote code. Typically, it is used when the loopup remote test  
fails to place the remote system into loopback. You can determine if the failure is an  
intermittent or a hard failure by continuously sending the 1:4 code, and monitoring the  
network status to see if the pattern is being received.  
The selections are available on the full link and on NET 1 and NET 2.  
Note: If the Loop Up Remote test fails to place the remote system into loopback, check  
that the Loop Code and Network Framing parameters are the same at each end of the link.  
1:2  
The 1:2 code is the loop down remote code. Use it when the Loop Down Remote test fails  
to terminate the remote loopback. You can determine if the failure is an intermittent or  
hard failure by continuously sending the 1:2 and monitoring the network status to see if the  
pattern is being received.  
The selections are available on the full link and on NET 1 and NET 2.  
User 1/User 2  
These two user programmable patterns (up to 24 characters) let you create a test pattern  
rather than use pre-programmed patterns.  
Lamp Test  
Use this test to verify the LEDs. During the test, all LEDs on the front panel illuminate.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
PERFORMING DIAGNOSTICS FROM THE TERMINAL  
Menu-9 Diagnostics  
Menu-9, Diagnostics, provides access to diagnostic testing screens and monitoring configuration  
screens. Any test described in “Performing Tests from the Front Panel” on page 65 can also be  
performed from the terminal screen menus.  
You can run several tests from your system’s internal diagnostics, shown in Menu-9, Diagnostics.  
Menu 9A — Physical Layer Diagnostics  
Menu 9B — Link Layer Diagnostics  
Menu 9C — Delay Monitoring Configuration  
Menu-9A Physical Layer Diagnostics  
This section describes the Menu-9A parameters and tests.  
To verify connections and the E1 line, run the basic diagnostic and pattern tests from Menu-9A,  
Physical Layer Diagnostics.  
Performing a Test from Menu-9A Physical Layer Diagnostics  
To run a test from Menu-9A, Physical Layer Diagnostics:  
1. Select the test and the port number in the Test field and set the Test length, USER1 and  
USER2 Pattern fields.  
2. Follow the screen prompts.  
Test results are shown in the upper portion of the screen.  
The selections for ports on which the test is performed are Net1, Net2, and on some tests, All Net.  
Port is ignored with the Self Test, or Lamp test.  
The Inject A Pattern Error option (to inject a single-bit error) is available only when the unit is  
sending a test pattern.  
PERFORMING DIAGNOSTICS FROM TELNET  
NOTE: Performing a test can cut off existing Telnet connections on the  
Ethernet and the NET Port. Since certain tests can cut off Telnet connections,  
only a subset of tests can be selected when the user logs onto the Dual Trunk  
E1 Router by Telnet through the NET Ports.  
Certain tests prevent the Telnet session from being disrupted when you Telnet into the unit. Tests  
that can be run through a Telnet connection are listed in Table 8-3.  
70  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 8-3 Tests Allowed Through Telnet Connection  
Test  
COM  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
NET  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Self Test  
Loop Net  
Loop Payload  
Loop Up Remote  
Loop Down Remote  
QRW Pattern  
1:7 Pattern  
3:24 Pattern  
1:1 Pattern  
All 1s Pattern  
All 0s Pattern  
1:2 Pattern  
1:4 Pattern  
User 1 Pattern  
User 2 Pattern  
Lamp Test  
NOTE: You do not need to notify the telephone company that you are running  
the tests. However, if the tests reveal a problem with telephone company  
service or with the Dual Trunk E1 Router, you should inform the telephone  
company that the Dual Trunk E1 Router must be removed from service.  
When performing a test, you can:  
Initiate loopbacks and tests on full bandwidth or on NET 1 or NET 2.  
Set programmable test patterns  
Link Layer Diagnostics and Delay Monitoring  
When installing or maintaining wide area connections, you must verify the end-to-end operation of  
the WAN links. With dedicated E1 line, you can verify the WAN link by placing the Dual Trunk E1  
Router on one end of the line in a loopback test and initiating the transmission of a pattern test from  
the other end. The pattern is received and monitored to detect transmission errors.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Link-based Testing for Public Packet Networks  
The link-based testing feature qualifies and tests PPP-based networks non-intrusively. Using the  
ICMP ping packet, the unit adds pattern generation and packet sequencing that allows single-ended  
and collaborative testing. This lets the user test his network from one end to the other using any  
TCP/IP-based test equipment. Link-based testing encapsulates a BERT pattern inside an ICMP  
message that the remote Dual Trunk E1 Router reflects. The packet can then be directed to test the  
network, or LAN port. Patterns supported include 511, 1023, 2047, all 1s, all 0s, and alternating 1s  
and 0s.  
Delay Monitoring for TCP/IP  
The delay monitoring feature provides network delay measurement beyond the link between the  
Dual Trunk E1 Router and any IP-addressable device on the network. Blackbox measures delay by  
using ping packets, which timestamp and obtain round-trip delays to specific IP addresses. The  
traffic added to support the measurement is minimal, and the user can configure the frequency. The  
length of the ping packet can allow delay measurements at different frame sizes. A user who is  
concerned about bandwidth taken away by the measurement can configure the test for a single, short  
ping every few minutes, making the test bandwidth penalty virtually non-existent.  
The link-based testing and delay monitoring features allow network managers to test links and  
quantify delays, and are especially useful during network installation and trouble isolation. Both  
features provide the benefit of circuit-level testing across the network.  
Non-Disruptive Testing  
The Link Layer Diagnostics and Delay Monitoring are non-disruptive to normal traffic. Unlike hard  
loopback tests that affect the line, Link Layer Diagnostics do not take the line out of service.  
Depending on the link speed and the test specified, Link Layer Diagnostics uses some of the  
bandwidth that would otherwise be available for payload. This bandwidth reduction is negligible if  
the test is specified with short and infrequent packets.  
On point-to-point networks Link Layer Diagnostics do not disrupt payload traffic.  
Menu-9B—Link Layer Diagnostics  
Link Layer Diagnostics uses an encapsulated Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) pattern inside ping  
messages and reflects the BERT pattern from the remote unit.  
1. Select a pattern test.  
2. Select the IP address of the equipment to send the PING message.  
Select the local or remote router, or the remote Dual Trunk E1 Router.  
3. Select a port to test.  
Ports are NET, Ethernet, and COM.  
4. Select the Test Interval  
Select time in seconds between 2 ping messages.  
72  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
5. Select the Test Length:  
The length of the test can be smaller than the time between two ping messages as specified  
in the previous step. If it is, only one ping is sent.  
6. Select the test packets length.  
From the minimum to the maximum allowed packet length (0 byte to 1500 bytes).  
7. Press S to start the test  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router begins sending ping messages at the specified intervals.  
Press the E key to terminate the test at any time.  
The results of this test are:  
Number of packets sent  
Number of packets received  
Number of errored packets  
Number of missing packets  
Average round trip delay  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
74  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Monitoring and Management  
9
MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router collects and displays performance data and other data useful for network  
troubleshooting. The Dual Trunk E1 Router monitors the E1 line continuously and displays all  
collected data on the terminal screen.  
This chapter describes how to monitor the unit status, display performance reports, and configure  
alarm conditions.  
You can monitor and manage the unit from a terminal, remote terminal Telnet connection, or an  
SNMP management station. In addition, if in–band management is enabled, you can monitor and  
manage the Dual Trunk E1 Router inband through a Telnet connection or an SNMP network  
management station.  
The terminal interface has menus which enable you to:  
Display or modify the unit configuration. For more information, refer to “Overview of the  
Configuration” on page 33.  
Configure alarm conditions, passwords, and modem connections. For more information, refer to  
Monitor the status of the unit and the Data Port. For more information, refer to “Menu-2 Data  
Monitor the Dual Trunk E1 Router performance database. For more information, refer to  
Run diagnostic tests. For more information, refer to “Troubleshooting the Unit” on page 87  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Terminal User Interface Access Methods  
Below is a brief review of how to access your Dual Trunk E1 Router for monitoring your unit  
for running tests.  
Super User versus normal user access rights. For more information, refer to “Configuring  
Logging on or off from a terminal. For more information, refer to “Logging On from a  
Logging on from a Telnet connection. For more information, refer to “Logging on from a Telnet  
MONITORING PERFORMANCE  
Each Dual Trunk E1 Router collects and displays performance data as well as additional parameters  
to help you troubleshoot problems. To manage and monitor the Dual Trunk E1 Router, use Menu-3,  
Reports, to display the unit’s performance reports, which are described further in this chapter.  
Additionally, reports on overall link utilization over a variety of intervals are available from Menu  
3.  
Displaying Performance Reports  
Several types of performance reports are available. Select a report in Menu-3, Reports. Type the  
corresponding letter or use the up and down arrow keys to move through the menu and press  
Returnto select the report.  
The first two reports display the carrier and user registers respectively. The carrier registers are the  
same as those reported over the FDL in response to FDL requests and can be cleared only by the  
carrier.  
NOTE: The maximum error count displayed in performance reports is 65,535.  
The actual value may be higher.  
Table 9-1 and Table 9-2 provide a comprehensive list of events and descriptions used in the  
Performance Reports. For more information, see Menu 3 and its sub menus.  
Performance Report Menus  
Table 9-1 Performance Report Menus  
Description  
Menu Screen  
3AA - Carrier Registers, Current  
Interval  
Displays performance data for the most current 15-minute interval.  
3AB - Carrier Registers, 24 hour  
total  
Displays performance data for the last 24-hour period.  
76  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 9-1 Performance Report Menus  
Menu Screen  
Description  
3AC - Carrier Registers, 24 Hour Displays performance data organized in 96 15-minute intervals.  
Detail  
3AE - Carrier Registers, 4 day  
Detail  
Displays performance data for every 15-minute interval in the last 4  
days. (up to 32 screens)  
3AF - Carrier Registers, 14 Day  
Summary  
Displays performance data totals for each day, for the last 14 days  
3AG- Carrier Registers, uptime  
total  
Displays performance data total for uptime interval.  
3BA - User Registers, Current  
Interval  
Displays performance data for the current interval.  
3BB - User Registers, 24 Hour  
Total  
Displays performance data for the last 24-hour period.  
Displays performance data organized in 96 15-minute intervals  
3BC- User Registers, 24 Hour  
detail  
3BE - User Registers, 4 day Detail Displays performance data for every 15-minute interval in the last 4 days.  
(up to 32 screens)  
3BF - User Register, 14 Day  
Summary  
Displays performance data totals for each day, for the last 14 days  
3BG - User Register, uptime total Displays performance data total for uptime interval.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Performance Data Report Events  
Table 9-2 Menu-3 Performance Data Report Events  
Event  
Description  
Unavailable Signal State  
Payload Loopback Actuated  
Current Interval Timer  
Errored Seconds (ES)  
Unavailable Seconds (UAS)  
This state is declared at the onset of ten consecutive SESs.  
The unit is in Payload Loopback.  
Displays the amount of time in a current interval, 0 - 899 seconds.  
A second with one or more CRC or CRC-4 errors.  
The number of seconds elapsed after 10 consecutive SES events are  
received.  
Severely Errored Seconds (SES)  
A second during which 832 or more CRC-4 violations or OOF events  
have occurred.  
Loss of Frame Count (LOFC)  
Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS)  
Background Block Error  
The number of times Loss of Frame is declared.  
The number of seconds in an interval in which a controlled slip occurred.  
(Background block errors/number of available blocks)*100.  
Number of available blocks is (number of available seconds)*1000.  
Event Log  
The Event Log feature is accessed through Menu-3Z. The Event Log is a running list of system  
events such as power on, power off, errors, configuration changes, and test status. When you access  
the Event Log, this information is displayed in a table as each even occurs. A complete list of  
events indicated by the Event Log are given in the Menu 3Z.  
78  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
ROUTING MONITORING  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router collects statistics on the following:  
Ethernet physical layer  
Data ethernet  
IP MIB Statistics  
Table 9-3 Routing Report Menus  
Menu Screen  
3FA - Ethernet physical layer  
Description  
Displays the ethernet protocol statistics which includes FCS errors, total  
single collision frames, total number of deferred transmissions, total  
number of late collisions, total number of carrier sense errors, and total  
number of frames received that are too long.  
3FB - Ethernet interface statistics Displays data ethernet statistics which include totals for octets  
received/transmitted, unicast packets received/transmitted, non unicast  
packets received/transmitted, number of packets received with unknown  
protocol IDs, RX packets received with Ethernet errors, and non-routable  
RX packets received.  
3FC - IP statistics  
Displays IP MIB statistics including: totals packets received  
3FE - ICMP Receive statistics  
Displays performance data for every 15-minute interval in the last 4  
days. (up to 32 screens)  
3FF - ICMP Transmit statistics  
3FG - ARP statistics  
Displays performance data totals for each day, for the last 14 days  
Displays performance data uptime totals for the NET1, NET2, and  
aggregate network port  
DELAY MONITORING  
The delay monitoring feature in the Dual Trunk E1 Router provides network delay measurement  
between the Dual Trunk E1 Router and any device on the network. The LRU4240 measures delay  
by using a ping protocol. As part of the pattern generation and packet sequencing, delay  
measurement will use the ping packet to timestamp and obtain round-trip delays to specific IP  
addresses. This method can measure the delay to any device that implements the TCP/IP protocol,  
not just to BlackBox units. The traffic added to support the measurement is minimal, and the user  
can configure traffic frequency. The length of the ping packet can allow delay measurements in  
different frame sizes. A user who is concerned about bandwidth utilization by the measure can  
configure the test for a single short ping every few minutes, making the test bandwidth penalty  
virtually non-existent.  
The link-based testing and delay monitoring features allow network managers to test network links,  
as well as quantify the network delay, and are especially useful during network installation and  
trouble isolation. Both features provide the benefit of circuit level testing across the network.  
Menu-9C allows you to configure the Dual Trunk E1 Router for delay monitoring. The results of the  
test are displayed in Menu-3M.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
MONITORING STATUS  
You can monitor the status of the Dual Trunk E1 Router unit from Menu-1, Main Status, and the  
status of the single data port from Menu-2, Data Status.  
Transmit and receive directions are monitored separately by the unit. The overall link utilization is  
reported in Menu-1, Main Status, and the report is updated once per second in each direction.  
Menu-1 Main Status  
You can monitor the status of the Dual Trunk E1 Router from Menu-1, Main Status. This menu  
presents information on unit status, network status, and Ethernet port status.  
Main Status Fields  
All fields in Menu-1 are read-only.  
Unit Status  
The Unit Status indicates the Dual Trunk E1 Router is operating normally, or if any special  
conditions exist.  
Net 1/Net 2 Network Status  
The Network Status field presents information on the condition of the received E1 signal.  
Data Ethernet Status  
Link up and Link down  
Clearing Error Counters  
1. To clear the error statistics counters, press C.  
Do you really want to clear the error counters (Y/N)  
2. Press yto confirm, or press any other key to take no action.  
Menu-2 Data Status  
Menu-2, Data Status, shows the current status of the Ethernet port, it will indicate “Link up” or  
“Link down”.  
INBAND MANAGEMENT  
The unit’s in–band management feature provides an easy way to manage Dual Trunk E1 Router  
network devices through the data path. This feature eliminates the need for external hardware (i.e.,  
serial cable), terminal server, Ethernet hub port, or router AUX port connection to manage the unit.  
80  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
In-band Network Registers, 24 Hour Detail  
On an in-band enabled system, Menu-3CB shows the performance data which describes l  
Table 9-4 Menu-3CB Field Definitions  
Field  
CRC  
Definition  
Number of packets received with CRC errors per interval.  
Number of received packets per interval.  
RxPkt  
Rx%  
TxPkt  
Tx%  
Bandwidth utilization in the received direction per interval.  
Number of packets sent out per interval.  
Bandwidth utilization in the transmit direction during interval.  
RMON-2  
RMON-2 provides additional SNMP reporting capabilities and the ability to identify the top  
bandwidth users.  
When using RMON-2 with the Dual Trunk E1 Router, the following RMON-2 groups are available:  
Protocol Directory  
Protocol Distribution  
Network Layer Host Table  
Application Layer Host Table  
Network Layer Matrix Table  
Application Layer Matrix Table  
Protocol Directory  
The RMON-2 Protocol Directory lists the protocols that the Dual Trunk E1 Router (agent) is  
monitoring on the network. The Dual Trunk E1 Router is capable of monitoring up to 16 protocols  
at a time. The default configuration includes the following protocols:  
IP  
ICMP  
UDP  
TCP  
FTP Control  
FTP Data  
Telnet  
SMTP (e-mail)  
DNS  
HTTP  
NETBIOS Name Service  
NETBIOS Datagram Service  
NETBIOS Session Service  
SNMP  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
SNMP Trap  
Lotus Notes  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router uses the limited extensibility feature as defined in RFC 2021.  
The protocol directory can process up to 16 protocols  
Each protocol must be a “child protocol” of IP, UDP, or TCP  
Using the limited extensibility feature, you can monitor any protocol that rides directly on top of IP,  
UDP or TCP. You may define a particular value to be recognized in the demultiplexing field of the  
parent protocol.  
NOTE: Changes will be stored in volatile memory and not remembered after  
the unit has been reset or powered off.  
Protocol Distribution  
The Protocol Distribution group allows the Dual Trunk E1 Router to discern how much traffic is  
being used by a specific protocol. When viewing this data in Choice View, you will be able to  
determine which protocols are the biggest users of the network’s bandwidth. This feature is referred  
to as Application Top Talkers.  
Network Layer and Application Layer Host Tables  
RMON-2 allows you to discern which IP addresses are contributing the most traffic to your  
network, and further, to drill down and find out which applications on these addresses are  
generating the most activity. Identifying these Top Talkers gives you increased control over your  
network and bandwidth usage.  
The Network Layer Host Table (nlHostTable) provides information on the 256 busiest IP addresses,  
while the Application Layer Host Table (alHostTable) lists how much traffic a particular IP address  
is sending using a particular protocol. When an IP address has been identified as one of the Top  
Talkers, periodically reading the alHostTable with Choice View, will reveal which application on  
that IP address is using the most bandwidth.  
The table has been implemented so that:  
There is one hlHostControlTable entry configured at boot time. Only one entry can exist at a  
time. It can be set to monitor the entire E1 (default).  
The hlHostControlNIMaxDesiredEntries is set to 256. The Dual Trunk E1 Router builds a table  
to monitor the activity of 256 IP addresses .  
The hlHostControlAIMaxDesiredEntries is set to 16. You can monitor 16 protocols at a time.  
NOTE: If more than 256 IP addresses are detected on the network, the Dual  
Trunk E1 Router replaces the least seen entry with the new entry in the  
nlHostTable.  
82  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Network Layer and Application LayerMatrix Tables  
Through the implementation of standardizedRMON2 network-layer matrix (nlMatrix) and  
application-layer matrix (alMatrix) groups, the Dual Trunk E1 Router tracks and reports traffic sent  
between pairs of network addresses and categorizes them by applications and protocols. Standard-  
based Network Management Software tools, such as Concord Health Traffic Accountant, uses  
nlMatrix group to generate IP conversation reports, and uses alMatrix to associate the applications  
involved in the IP conversations. Up to 1024 conversations can be monitored simultaneously.  
Optional ChoiceView Plus software application lets you generate IP conversation reports from  
RMON2 data collected by the Dual Trunk E1 Router.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
84  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Alarms  
10  
This chapter discusses alarm conditions and how these conditions are displayed.  
CONFIGURING ALARM CONDITIONS  
When the Dual Trunk E1 Router detects an alarm condition, the unit reports the condition to the  
terminal.  
Depending on your network management environment, the unit may also send alarm messages or  
SNMP trap messages.  
Set alarm conditions in Menu-8A, Alarm Configuration.  
The Dual Trunk E1 Router reports alarm conditions to the device connected to its COMM Port  
(such as a terminal or modem)  
SNMP traps are sent as configured in Menu-0B, SNMP Configuration; otherwise, the connection  
indicated in Menu-8C identifies from where the alarms are reported.  
If a modem is connected, the unit causes the modem to dial out (if in Menu 8C, Connection is set to  
Modem; valid telephone numbers are set in Phone Number 1 or Phone Number 2; in Menu-8A.  
Ethernet Signal Loss Alarmis Enabled and Block all Alarms is set to No).  
NOTE: If IP is enabled, only SNMP traps are sent. Alarms will not be  
displayed on the terminal.  
How Alarm Reports Are Displayed  
Alarms are displayed on a terminal at the bottom of the screen when the terminal is connected to the  
COMM Port and you are logged on:  
Example—Ethernet Signal Loss Alarm will be given at the bottom of the screen, as follows:  
??? ID: Oahu Data1 Carrier Loss Start: 07:17:37 Feb.22, 1997--  
The alarm includes the unit ID, type of alarm, start or end of alarm condition, date, and time. The  
alarm information remains on the screen either until a new alarm occurs or until you select a new  
screen.  
When no alarm is present, a dotted line (similar in appearance to the one below) is shown:  
---------------------------------------------  
When you are not logged on, the alarm appears as a single line showing the unit ID, type of alarm,  
start or end of alarm, and the time stamp, if IP is disabled.  
In SNMP mode, the system sends the alarm as an SNMP trap to the SNMP manager which displays  
it on the SNMP console.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Menu-8 Alarm  
Menu-8, Alarm, provides access to four sub-menus:  
Alarm Configuration  
Miscellaneous Management Configuration  
Modem Initialization Strings  
COMM Port Configuration  
Select the corresponding option to view and configure parameters for alarm configuration, external  
alarm configuration, for miscellaneous management configuration, and modem initialization strings.  
For more information on Menu 8, see the 4200 WAN Access Platform TUI Reference Guide.  
Menu-8A Alarm Configuration  
When you select Alarm Configuration, Menu 8A appears. Menu 8A allows you enable or block  
alarm reporting, and select if alarms associated with the Ethernet signal will be reported.  
Menu-8C Miscellaneous Management Configuration  
When you select Miscellaneous Management, Menu-8C appears. Menu 8C allows you to  
configure a variety of parameters including connection, phone numbers, timing and error thresholds.  
Menu-8E Modem Initialization Strings  
If you select Modem Initialization Strings, Menu 8E appears Each unit can have a maximum of  
two modem initialization strings. The first string (String 1) can be equal to or less than 20  
characters, and the second string (String 2) can be equal to or less than 60 characters.  
To initiate a modem connection:  
1. The unit sends +++, followed by the first modem initialization string.  
2. The unit then waits for a response from the modem to guard against the possibility of  
losing the characters immediately after the modem resets.  
3. After receiving the modem response, the unit sends the second initialization string (if  
this string is programmed). The Dual Trunk E1 Router assumes that the modem always  
sends a response; therefore, do not program the modem not to send a response.  
4. If using the modem reset command, you should program everything up to the reset  
command as the first modem initialization string.  
5. Program the remaining commands as the second modem initialization string.  
86  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Troubleshooting  
11  
TROUBLESHOOTING THE UNIT  
This section describes problems you may encounter and provides suggested methods to troubleshoot  
and resolve the problems.  
UNIT PROBLEMS  
A list of possible problems is given in Table 11-1, along with suggested solutions for each.  
Table 11-1 Unit Problems (1 of 4)  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Solution  
The LRU4240 does not power up. • Unit not plugged in.  
• Loose power connector.  
• Make sure the unit is plugged into a  
live AC outlet, if the unit is AC  
powered. If the shelf is DC  
powered, make sure the respective  
DC leads are not crossed.  
• PDU (Power Distributor Unit)  
isn’t powered up/on.  
• Blown fuse on LRU4240.  
• Check to assure that all fuses are  
operational; replace as needed. If  
the problem persists, call Black  
Box Technical Support for  
assistance.  
• Reversed power leads from DC  
supply (standalone).  
The LRU4240 system does not  
dial out when an alarm occurs.  
• Miscellaneous configuration on  
Alarm Menu-8C.  
• Make sure the connection between  
the COMM Port and the modem is  
a crossover (null) modem  
connection.  
• Modem strings 8E not correct.  
• Wrong cable.  
• A DCE Port is represented the same  
way as the modem port.  
• No modem attached.  
• Make sure Connection is set to  
Modem and two valid telephone  
numbers are set in Phone Number 1  
and Phone Number 2 in Menu-8C.  
• Make sure Block all Alarms is set  
to No in Menu-8A and the  
occurring alarm is set to Enabled.  
• If the above solutions do not  
correct the problem, call Black Box  
Technical Support for assistance.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 11-1 Unit Problems (2 of 4)  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Solution  
Current user initiated tests  
terminate themselves without user  
intervention.  
• Misconfiguration for Menu-9A  
Timeout.  
• Make sure the system is set to run  
the test for an unlimited amount of  
time.  
• Test length options are 15 min., 1  
min., 60 min., Unlimited.  
With Self Test, Loop Up Remote  
and Loop Down Remote, Unlimited  
does not apply.  
• If the above step does not correct  
the problem, call Black Box  
Technical Support for assistance.  
The system cannot be put into  
network loopback from the remote  
unit.  
• Unit does not recognize Loop  
command being sent.  
• Make sure the remote unit is  
sending the correct loop code.  
• Loopback detect is disabled on  
unit.  
• Make sure the system is set to  
receive the same standard or  
alternate code as the remote unit.  
• Circuit is down or in Loop towards  
remote unit.  
• Using your E1 test set, send a loop  
up code into the system. If the  
system still does not loop up, call  
Black Box Technical Support for  
assistance.  
The system cannot be put into  
payload loopback from the  
network.  
• Framing protocol choice.  
• Make sure the system is set for  
T1.403 Annex B fractional  
loopback code, if the network is  
sending T1.403 Annex B to loop it  
up.  
• Wrong timeslots used for test  
signal.  
• Make sure the payload portion you  
are attempting to loop up has  
assigned bandwidth.  
• If the LRU4240 still does not loop  
up, use your E1 test set to inject a  
fractional loopback signal into the  
payload you wish to loop up.  
• If the above steps fail, call Black  
Box Technical Support for  
assistance.  
After power-up, the menu clock no • Time not set.  
• Set the time in Menu-4.  
longer shows the correct time or  
date.  
• If the time is still incorrect, call  
Technical Support.  
88  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 11-1 Unit Problems (3 of 4)  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Solution  
No response from any unit on the • Bad cable.  
communication network.  
• Make sure that Pin 8, CTS, is not  
connected at the ASCII terminal  
end of the COMM Port cable.  
• Wrong baud rate.  
• Hung terminal. Restart terminal  
session.  
• Standard Black Box COMM Port  
cables do not have this connection  
at the ASCII terminal end. Some  
ASCII terminals will activate the  
CTS line, and thus interfere with  
the LRU4240 collision avoidance.  
• Get a null modem adapter to cross  
pins 2 and 3 (transmit and receive)  
on the terminal.  
• The COMM Port cable is connected  
to an inactive or faulty port on the  
terminal, or the terminal is faulty.  
• Replace the COMM Port cable if it  
is faulty.  
• Make sure the COMM Port  
parameters match the terminal’s  
parameters.  
No response from some units on  
the network.  
• Mismatch baud rate.  
• Break in cable.  
• Make sure the LRU4240 is  
powered up.  
• Make sure the unit ID is correct.  
• Swap the connector positions with  
a unit that has no problem  
communicating with the terminal,  
to find out if a portion of the  
COMM Port cable is faulty.  
• Make sure the COMM Port  
parameters match the terminal’s  
parameters.  
Invalid data is received from one  
or all units on the network.  
• Baud rate configuration.  
• EMI.  
• Make sure the COMM Port  
parameters (on the problem units)  
match the terminal’s parameters.  
• Two units with the same ID.  
Verify that none of the units are  
missing an ID and that no two units  
have the same unit ID.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 11-1 Unit Problems (4 of 4)  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Solution  
Some invalid data is received  
mixed in with a mostly good menu  
display.  
• Refresh screen image.  
• To refresh screen, press  
Ctrl-L.  
• 1 or more units are missing at ID,  
or two units have the same ID.  
• Reduce the baud rate on the units  
and terminal if you are using the  
maximum (38400 baud) for  
communicating with a very large  
number of units.  
• If the cable from the network to the  
terminal exceeds the 15 m (50 ft.)  
maximum, fix the length.  
Verify that none of the units are  
missing an ID and that no two units  
have the same unit ID.  
NETWORK PROBLEMS  
Table 11-2 Network Problems (1 of 4)  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Solution  
The unit experiences a loss of  
signal or a loss of frame on the  
Network Port.  
• Equipment Failure  
• Test E1.  
• Apply hardware loop to front of  
unit.  
90  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 11-2 Network Problems (2 of 4)  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Solution  
• Run a lamp test from Menu-9,  
Diagnostics to make sure the LEDs  
are working.  
The NET LED does not  
illuminate.  
• No incoming signal.  
• Bad LED.  
• Make sure the E1 line from your  
service provider is connected to the  
RJ-48C female connector on the  
back of the LRU4240 NTU.  
• Remove the E1 line from the back  
of the LRU4240 and place the E1  
test set in its place. Connect the  
transmit of the E1 test set to the  
receive of the network plug (pins 3  
and 11, 3—tip, 11—ring). If the  
NET LED changes to any color,  
i.e., green or red, contact your  
service provider for assistance with  
cutting over the E1 line.  
• Place the E1 loopback plug on the  
network connector on the back of  
the LRU4240. If it then changes  
color, troubleshoot your test setup.  
• If the NET LED never lights, call  
Black Box Technical Support for  
assistance.  
The NET LED is constantly red.  
• Constant out-of-sync or out-of-  
frame on E1.  
• Make sure the E1 line framing  
format matches the LRU4240’s  
framing format.  
• Misframe/FE.  
• Check the LRU4240 for excessive  
errors.  
• Carrier has problem.  
• Configuration doesn’t match  
framing.  
• In CRC4-Enabled mode, check for  
CRC and CV; in CRC4-Disabled  
mode, check for CVs only. If  
excessive errors appear, place your  
E1 test set or your loopback plug  
on the RJ-48C or BNC socket on the  
back of the system to see if the  
errors stop.  
• If they do, contact your service  
provider for assistance.  
• If the errors do not stop, call Black  
Box Technical Support for  
assistance.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 11-2 Network Problems (3 of 4)  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Solution  
The NET LED remains constant  
amber/yellow.  
• Incoming RAI or UAI.  
• Check to see if the LRU4240 is  
receiving a RAI alarm or an AIS  
alarm.  
• Make sure the remote/far end  
system is receiving a proper E1  
signal. If it is not, it will be  
generating a RAI alarm towards  
your equipment.  
• If the system is still receiving a RAI  
alarm, place the E1 test set or the E1  
loopback plug on the RJ-48C or  
BNC socket on the back of the  
LRU4240. If the RAI alarm stops,  
contact your service provider for  
assistance.  
• If, after all above steps have been  
satisfied, your LRU4240 still shows  
a yellow NET LED, call Black Box  
Technical Support for assistance.  
92  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 11-2 Network Problems (4 of 4)  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Solution  
• Make sure the timing source is  
properly configured. Timing should  
be set to NETWORK if the network  
is the source.  
The NET LED flickers  
intermittently between red, amber  
and green.  
• Receiving errors on NET Port  
(CV, CRC, FE, etc).  
• If it is not the source, timing should  
be set to INTERNAL at one E1 end,  
and NETWORK at the other end.  
• If you’re not sure that the network is  
the source, contact the network  
provider and discuss your circuit  
order. The provider will tell you if  
the E1 network is the source.  
• If the timing source is properly  
configured and the NET LED  
continues to flicker between red,  
amber and green, isolate the system  
with the E1 test set to see if the  
problem clears.  
• Place the E1 test set into the proper  
timing mode (provide timing or  
recover timing). You cannot use the  
loopback plug in this application  
since it would require us to provide  
timing and would not allow us to  
see if we can recover timing from a  
valid E1 source.  
• If the NET LED continues to  
flicker, call Black Box Technical  
Support for assistance.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
94  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Specifications  
A
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS  
Performance  
Item  
Rating  
Maximum Packet Length  
• 65535 bytes (for payload traffic)  
• 1536 bytes (for SNMP management)  
Maximum Packet Rate  
11,000 packets/sec duplex. Dual Trunk E1 Router  
will discard packets over this amount  
LRU4240 Network Interface  
Item  
Rating  
Transmit bit rate  
Receive bit rate  
Line code  
2.048 Mbs ± 50 ppm  
2.048 Mbs ± 75 ppm  
HDB3  
Framing  
ITU-TS G.704/CTR 12  
ITU-TS G.703/CTR 12  
ITU-TS G.823/CTR 12  
ITU-TS G.703/CTR 12  
Network 1, Network2 , or Internal  
0 to -26 dB  
Pulse shape  
Jitter  
Output level  
System timing  
Input level  
Impedance  
75 Ohm (BNC) unbalanced or 120 Ohm  
(RJ-48) balanced  
LRU4240 Data Interface  
Item  
Specification  
Ethernet 10BaseT  
Interface types  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Power Options  
Item  
Specification  
AC Power  
Universal Power Supply  
100 VAC to 240 VAC Autoranging, 50/60 Hz  
DC Power  
-40 VDC to -78 VDC  
Through two-position Phoenix connector  
Power Consumption  
9 W maximum per unit  
Physical  
Item  
Specification  
Dimensions  
8.75 in W (22.2 cm) x 1.75 in H (4.4 cm) x 12 in  
depth (30.4 cm)  
Weight  
6.5 lb (3.0 kg)  
RJ-48  
Network Connector  
COMM Port Connector 8 Pin modular  
Ethernet Management  
Interface  
RJ-45 socket  
Environmental  
Item  
Specification  
Operating Temperature  
Storage Temperature  
Relative Humidity  
Altitude  
0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F) ambient  
-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to 140°F)  
0% to 95% noncondensing  
15,000 ft (4.6 km)  
Reliability  
MTBF 12 years minimum  
LRU4240 Diagnostics  
Item  
Diagnostics And Tests  
Loopbacks  
E1 Network, E1 Payload, Fractional E1 Payload  
Set/Reset Code, Front Panel, COMM Port  
E1 Loopback Control  
Fractional Payload  
Loopback Control  
CCITT V.54 Sequence, COMM Port  
96  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Item  
Diagnostics And Tests  
Test Patterns  
QRW, 1:1, 1:7, 3:24, All 1s, All 0s, 2-User Programmable 24 Bit Patterns, bit error  
injection  
Alarm Parameters  
E1 Network Port  
NET Carrier Loss Alarm  
NET Sync Loss Alarm  
NET AIS Alarm  
NET RAI Alarm  
CRC, CV, FE Threshold Alarm  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table A-1 Default Configuration (1 of 2)  
Configuration  
Factory Default Settings  
Your Configuration  
Unit Configuration  
Unit ID  
Protect Mode  
Idle Code  
Unique ID assigned  
Disabled  
0xFF  
In-band Monitoring  
Link Monitored  
Enabled  
Net 1 (in independent links)  
Net (in MLPPP mode)  
Network port 1 Configuration  
CRC4  
Main Sync Source  
Alternate Sync Source  
Enabled  
Network  
Internal  
Network port 2 (Aux)  
Configuration  
CRC4  
Main Sync Source  
Alternate Sync Source  
Enabled  
Network  
Internal  
Diagnostic Configuration  
User Pattern 1  
User Pattern 2  
001100110011001100110011  
000000010000000100000001  
Alarm Configuration  
Block All Alarms  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Net Carrier Loss Alarm  
Net UAI received Alarm  
Net RAI received Alarm  
Loss of Signal from data port  
Net Sync Loss Alarm  
CV Threshold Alarm  
CRC Threshold Alarm  
Ethernet loss signal Alarm  
FE Threshold Alarm  
SNMP Configuration  
1st NMS Address  
1st Output Port  
0.0.0.0  
COM  
2nd NMS Address  
2nd Output Port  
0.0.0.0  
COM  
3rd NMS Address  
3rd Output Port  
0.0.0.0  
COM  
Get Community String  
Set Community String  
Trap Community String  
public  
public  
public  
98  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table A-1 Default Configuration (2 of 2)  
Configuration  
Factory Default Settings  
Your Configuration  
COMM Port and Terminal  
Configuration  
Direct  
Connection  
10 minutes  
Timeout when Logged on  
Timeout when not Logged on  
COMM Port  
Unlimited  
38400, 8, no parity, 2 stop bits  
Enabled  
Terminal Mode  
Phone Number 1  
Phone Number 2  
Normal User Password  
Superuser Password  
Not Assigned  
Not Assigned  
Not Assigned  
Not Assigned  
Not Assigned  
Modem String Configuration  
Modem String 1  
ATEOVOZO  
Modem String 2  
ATV0E0Q0F1C1S0=1S2=43S3=13S4=10S7=30S12=50&C1&D0  
Ethernet Configuration  
IP Address  
0.0.0.0  
IP Mask  
0.0.0.0  
IP Gateway  
0.0.0.0  
MAC Address  
(Unique ID assigned)  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
100  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Cable and Connector Pin Assignments  
B
E1 NETWORK PIN ASSIGNMENTS  
The pin assignments for the RJ48 network interface connector are listed in the Table B-1 below.  
Table B-1 Network Interface Pin Assignments  
RJ48 Pin  
Signal  
5
Send toward Network Tip (T1)  
Send toward Network Ring (R1)  
Receive from Network Tip (T)  
Receive from Network Ring (R)  
NC  
4
2
1
3, 6, 7, 8  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
COMMUNICATION PORT PIN ASSIGNMENTS  
Table B-7 describes the COMM Port (RJ45) pin assignments.  
Table B-2 Communication Port Pin Assignments  
RJ45 Pins  
Signal  
SD  
Description  
3
6
Send Data (from Dual Trunk E1 Router to terminal)  
Receive Data (from terminal to Dual Trunk E1 Router)  
Clear To Send (I/O to all Dual Trunk E1 Routers only)  
Signal Ground (bi-directional)  
RD  
1
8
CTS  
SG  
4, 5  
7
DCD  
Carrier Detect  
1. CTS is used by the Dual Trunk E1 Router as a collision avoidance line. This line should not be  
connected at the CRT terminal end of the COMM Port cable.  
DE-9 to DB-25 Adapter Pin Assignments  
BlackBox can provide a DE-9 to DB-25 adapter for the BlackBox DE-9 COMM Port ribbon cable.  
The pinout assignments for the adapter are listed in Table B-8 below.  
Table B-3 DE-9 to DB-25 Adapter Pinouts  
DE-9  
DB-25  
3
2
7
8
6
5
1
9
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
23  
21  
102  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Software Upgrade  
C
SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD  
The Download feature enables you to upgrade software, and includes the following capabilities:  
Separates the downloading operation from switching to new software, where these operations  
can be performed at separate times. You can schedule a time at which the unit can be initialized  
with the new code.  
Command remotely using SNMP the TFTP/XModem download and code switching  
The unit stores two images of executable code; you can switch between the two images.  
Enables downloading of the new software while the unit is operational and passing data. The  
code can be downloaded through:  
Xmodem via the terminal user interface using an asynchronous connection.  
TFTP from a network management station to the unit via SLIP using an asynchronous  
connection or through NET or Ethernet Ports in-band.  
TFTP via Ethernet.  
Using the Download Menu Utility  
Use the Download Utility menu, accessed through Menu-4, Main Configuration, to download  
software updates. You may use the Xmodem protocol or TFTP. When switching from one  
executable image to another, the operational software in the unit is restarted, which results in a  
temporary service interruption lasting from one to two minutes.  
During the download sequence, the Power/Test LED will blink alternating red and green.  
Setting Up for Xmodem  
To download new software:  
1. Insert the new software diskette in the drive of the PC.  
2. From Menu-4 Main Configuration, type F(as instructed in the menu for FLASH  
Download) to start the download session.  
3. Menu 4F (Software Download Menu) will appear  
4. Select the Protocol (Xmodem or TFTP) to Xmodem under Protocol.  
5. Press Ato start the download.  
Setting Up for TFTP  
Use these steps to set up for TFTP::  
1. Set the download protocol in the Download utility to TFTP.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
2. Press A in the Download Utility menu.  
3. Start TFTP for the Network Management System, and indicate binary mode.  
Abnormal Termination  
The following list summarizes scenarios during which the downloading process may fail:  
Software load is corrupted.  
Transmission errors.  
Failure of the downloading computer, the modem (if one is used), the connection between the  
downloading computer and the unit or a failure of the unit, which also includes a power failure.  
User aborted the download process.  
Time-out built into the Xmodem or TFTP protocols.  
Typically, abnormal termination of the download process leaves the Code File in a non-usable state.  
In this case, the Download Utility will indicate that the Code File is unavailable.  
Error Indicators  
If the download utility fails, an error indicator appears in the Download Utility menu. Depending on  
the error indicator listed below in Table C-1, you can take the following action or at least be  
apprised of the condition:  
Table C-1 Download Utility Error Indicators (1 of 2)  
Error  
Error Type  
General  
Indicator  
Description (Message)  
1
Software error. Note the specific error information, and call Black Box  
Technical Support.  
2
Load Received is corrupted.  
Load Received has invalid embedded length.  
Load Received is invalid for this unit.  
Flash-ROM Not Supported.  
3
4
Hardware  
Xmodem  
5
6
Flash-ROM With Protected Sector.  
Flash-ROM Failed To Erase.  
Flash-ROM Failed To Program.  
Xmodem Abort Received.  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Xmodem Data Timeout.  
Xmodem Invalid Sequence.  
Xmodem Unexpected Data.  
Xmodem Packet Timeout.  
Xmodem Packet Corrupted.  
Xmodem Failed to Acknowledge.  
104  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table C-1 Download Utility Error Indicators (2 of 2)  
Error  
Error Type  
Indicator  
Description (Message)  
Xmodem Reserved.  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
Xmodem Reserved.  
Xmodem Reserved.  
TFTP  
TFTP Error Packet Received  
TFTP Invalid Mode.  
TFTP Invalid Opcode.  
TFTP Unexpected Opcode Sequence.  
TFTP Invalid Packet Length.  
TFTP Invalid Data Packet Sequence.  
TFTP Request Timeout.  
TFTP Data Packet Timeout.  
TFTP Failed to Acknowledge.  
Download Aborted by User  
You may abort the Xmodem downloading process by pressing Ctrl-x.  
To perform the downloading abort, instruct the terminal emulator program to abort the Xmodem  
download process and return to terminal mode. The specific procedure depends on the terminal  
emulator program being used. The recovery is the same as explained under Abnormal Termination.  
With TFTP, the procedure to discontinue the TFTP session depends on the TFTP setup. Again, the  
recovery is the same as explained under Abnormal Termination.  
The parameter groups for the Download Utility are given in Table 11-3.  
Table 11-3 Menu 4F Download Utility (1 of 2)  
Group  
Field  
Description  
CODE FILE  
1 Version  
Version of the operational software residing in Code-File 1. This field  
reads “Absent” if there is no operational software stored in this code-file  
or if the operational software is corrupted.  
2 Version  
Version of the operational software residing in Code-File 2. This field  
reads “Absent” if there is no operational software stored in this code-file  
or if the operational software is corrupted.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table 11-3 Menu 4F Download Utility (2 of 2)  
Group  
Field  
Description  
DOWNLOAD  
Code File  
The Code-File that will receive the downloaded operational-code, and  
that is currently not operational.  
Status  
Shows the status of the download, and is either Idle, Start, In Progress,  
Verifying, Success, or error. This field is updated after an Xmodem  
download to the local unit. If the status is “Error”, then a number  
associated with the failure indicates the specific problem.  
Error  
Indicates a specific problem during download.  
Bytes Received  
Shows the number of bytes received during the download. This field is  
updated after an Xmodem download to the local unit.  
Protocol  
Protocol used for the download. Choices are Xmodem and TFTP.  
CHANGE  
Code File  
Code-File to be switched over when the scheduled time is reached.  
Choices are NONE, 1, and 2. NONE indicates that no change is desired,  
and can be used to cancel a scheduled change.  
Method  
Either SCHEDULED or NOW. NOW indicates that the change occurs  
immediately, and SCHEDULED indicates that the change occurs when  
the actual time reaches the scheduled time.  
Scheduled Date  
Scheduled Time  
Count Down  
Expressed in DD/MM/YY (day, month, and year) at which the switch-  
over will occur.  
Expressed in HH:MM:SS (hours, minutes, seconds) at which the switch-  
over will occur.  
Shows the time interval HH:MM:SS (hours, minutes, seconds) for the  
switch-over to occur after it has been initiated. If the switch-over has not  
been initiated, then it shows “Press 2 To Start” or “Press 4 To Start” for  
the local unit and the remote unit, respectively.  
Programming software upgrades remotely  
Starting with software release 2.3RT, you can initiate the code download and initialization remotely  
using SNMP commands. The Menu-4 download utility commands, download method (TFTP or  
Xmodem) and schedule date and time, have associated SNMP variables in the eclipse MIB.  
The sample script shown below illustrates a remote TFTP download:  
#!/bin/ksh  
NODE="172.25.150.1"  
BIN_FILE="074-04240-01sr2.3RT.bin"  
snmpset $NODE .1.3.6.1.4.1.300.200.2.49.1.0 integer 1  
tftp $NODE <<EOT  
bin  
put $BIN_FILE  
quit  
106  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
EOT  
snmpget 172.25.150.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.300.200.2.49.5  
snmpget 172.25.150.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.300.200.2.49.9  
SOFTWARE-ONLY UPGRADES  
All upgrades to the 4200 WAN Access Platform are software-only upgrades. The hardware unit ships  
from the factory with all the physical ports even if they are not used with the configured software. The  
physical ports include two serial DTE ports, two T1/E1 ports, COMM port, and Ethernet port.  
Changing software  
You can also change the software configuration of your 4200T/E . For example you can reconfigure  
your unit from a 4210 CSU/DSU to a 4230 Access Router. This configuration change requires  
downloading a new software code into the unit, configuring the software menus, and changing the  
network and DTE connections.  
Contact BlackBox Technical support to obtain any software upgrade.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
108  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Menus  
D
This appendix lists all of the Dual Trunk E1 Router Menus and their descriptions.  
Table D-1 Router Menus (1 of 5)  
Menu  
Number Name  
Description  
Page  
0
IP Configuration  
Selection menu for following submenus:  
• Interface configuration  
• SNMP configuration  
• Ethernet configuration  
• Performance monitoring configuration  
• LMI configuration  
• SLA configuration  
0A  
Interface Configuration  
Traffic type (PPP or Frame Relay), Multilink, Interface IP addresses  
(Ethernet, Network, and COMM ports).  
0B  
0C  
0E  
0F  
SNMP Configuration  
Ethernet Configuration  
Performance monitoring  
LMI configuration  
SNMP Traps, NMS IP addresses andcommunications Settings.  
Configure data speed mode (Full or half duplex).  
Frame Relay performance monitoring.  
Enable LMI and set polling and error parameters. Set UNI-U or UNI-N  
interfaces.  
0H  
0L  
1
SLA configuration  
Frame Relay SLA FRF.13 configuration  
Outage source configuration Reserved. Do not use.  
Main Status  
Displays unit status, LAN and WAN connection status (Ethernet, NET1, and 117  
NET2.  
2
3
Ethernet Data Status  
Reports  
Shows the status of the ethernet port. “Link up” or “Link Down”.  
None  
Access to carriers and users registers reports, inband reports, SLA reports,  
Ethernet and IP statistics.  
3A  
Carrier Reports  
Carrier Reports lets you access network ports physical layer statistics.  
Select which of the NET1, NET2, or aggregate carrier registers to display.  
Use n (for next) and p (for previous) to select which of the three network  
ports (NET1, NET2, or aggregate) you want to view statistics.  
3AA- Carrier Registers,  
Current Interval  
Real-time statistics for current interval.  
3AB- Carrier Registers,  
Total Over 24 Hours  
Net statistics in for last 24 hours. Summary.  
Net statistics for last 24 hours in 15-minute intervals.  
Net statistics in 384 15-minute intervals.  
3AC- Carrier Registers, 24  
Hour Detail  
3AE- Carrier Registers, 4  
Day Detail  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table D-1 Router Menus (2 of 5)  
Menu  
Number Name  
Description  
Page  
3AF- Carrier Registers, 14  
Day Summary  
Net statistics for last 14 days. Summary.  
Net statistics for uptime interval.  
User Reports submenu.  
3AG- Carrier Registers,  
uptime total  
3B  
User Reports  
3BA- User Registers,  
Current Interval  
Net statistics for the current interval  
Net statistics for last 24 hours. Summary.  
Net statistics in 96 15-minute intervals.  
3BB- User Registers, 24  
Hour Total  
3BC- User Registers, 24  
Hour Detail  
3BE- User Registers, 4 Day Net statistics in 384 15-minute intervals.  
Detail  
3BF- User Registers, 14 Day Net statistics for last 14 days. Summary.  
Summary  
3BG- User Registers, uptime Net statistics for uptime interval. Summary.  
total  
3C  
In-band Reports  
Inband Reports submenu.  
3CA- In-band Ethernet  
Registers, current interval  
Provides detail inband Ethernet Registers for the current 15 minutes  
interval.  
3CB- Inband Network  
Registers, current intervall  
Provides detail on inband network registers for the current 15 minutes  
interval.  
3CC- Inband Ethernet  
registers, 24 Hour total  
Shows inband Ethernet registers in 96 fifteen-minute intervals.  
Displays inband network registers in last 96 fifteen minutes  
Displays inband ethernet registers lifetime counters.  
3CE- Inband Network  
registers, 24 Hour tota  
3CF- Inband Ethernet  
registers, lifetime total  
3CG- Inband Network  
registers, lifetime total  
Displays inband network registers lifetime counters.  
3CH- Inband Ethernet  
registers, 24 hour details  
Inband Ethernet registers performance data for the last 24 hours.  
Inband Network registers performance data for the last 24 hour detail  
3CI- Inband Network  
registers, 24 hour detail  
3E  
PPP statistics  
Displays the PPP Link Control Protocol (LCP) and Network Control  
Protocol (LCP) statistics enabling you to troubleshoot PPP and MLPPP  
sessions.  
110  
SALES: 0118 965 5100  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table D-1 Router Menus (3 of 5)  
Menu  
Number Name  
Description  
Displays the SLA reports submenu  
Page  
3E  
In Frame Relay mode:  
SLA Reports  
3EA  
DLCI Outages  
Provides information on the type, number, and duration of outages on a per 119  
DLCI basis. As specified in FRF.13, outages are defined as either Fault  
(Outages) or Excluded.  
3EB  
3EC  
Frame Transfer Delays  
Provides information on the number of threshold violations per DLCI.  
Local Transmit Data  
Delivery Report  
Provides information on the network’s (per DLCI) effectiveness in  
transporting data. It also provides the DDR for data delivered within CIR,  
and data delivered in excess of CIR.  
3EE  
Local Receive Data Delivery Provides information on the network’s (per DLCI) effectiveness in receiving 120  
Report  
data. It also provides the DDR for data received within CIR, and data  
received in excess of CIR.  
3EF  
3EG  
3FA  
Local Transmit Frame  
Delivery Report  
Provides a view of how effective the frame relay network has been effective 121  
at packet transmission.  
Local Receive Frame  
Delivery Report  
Provides a view of how effective the network has been at packet reception. 121  
Ethernet physical layer  
Displays the ethernet protocol statistics which includes FCS errors, total  
single collision frames, total number of deferred transmissions, total number  
of late collisions, total number of carrier sense errors, and total number of  
frames received that are too long.  
3FB  
Ethernet interface statistics  
Displays data ethernet statistics which include totals for octets  
received/transmitted, unicast packets received/transmitted, non unicast  
packets received/transmitted, number of packets received with unknown  
protocol IDs, RX packets received with Ethernet errors, and non-routable  
RX packets received.  
3FC  
3FE  
IP statistics  
Displays IP MIB statistics including: totals packets received  
ICMP receive statistics  
Displays performance data for every 15-minute interval in the last 4 days. 122  
(up to 32 screens)  
3FF  
ICMP tranmist statistics  
ARP statistics  
Displays performance data totals for each day, for the last 14 days  
3FG  
Displays performance data uptime totals for the NET1, NET2, and  
aggregate network por  
3M  
Delay monitoring results  
Displays results of “Delay Monitoring configuration” tests initiated from  
menu-9C  
3Z  
4A  
4B  
4F  
4T  
Event Log  
Alarm History log.  
Unit Configuration  
Set general configuration parameters.  
Net Configuration and Status View status of individual links and choose line setting for each port.  
Download Utility Screen  
GMT Time sync  
Configure time and date synchronization (RFC868).  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table D-1 Router Menus (4 of 5)  
Menu  
Number Name  
Description  
Page  
4V  
Timezone configuration  
Set unit's local time. This menu works in conjunction with GMT Time Sync 127  
menu-4T (RFC-868).  
When RFC 868 is used to get time, time server provides GMT. If a unit is  
deployed in different time zone user needs to configure the units  
appropriately.Day light savings ends in October.  
6A  
6A  
MLFR Configuration  
View and set the following Multilink Frame Relay configuration  
parameters: Link Integrity Timer, Link Acknowledge, and Retry Counter.  
PPP/MLPPP Unit  
configuration  
View and set PPP configuration parameters.  
6B  
6B  
6Z  
7
MFR port configuration  
PPP/MLPPP Port Status  
Timeslot Configuration  
Features  
View link status and protocol errors per link.  
View link status and protocol errors per link.  
Fractional E1 speed configuration and port mapping to Ethernet data port.  
Reserved for software feature key upgrades.  
8
Alarm  
Alarm Selection submenu.  
8A  
8C  
Alarm Configuration  
Allows user to enable/disable alarms and to set alarm thresholds.  
Miscellaneous Management Dial out, passwords, alarm port settings.  
Configuration  
8E  
8F  
8G  
Modem Initialization Strings Setting menu for modem initialization strings.  
36  
Comm port configuration  
User authentication server  
Configure the comm port speed  
Configure Radius authentication protocol. See “Configuring Radius  
Authentication” on page 36  
8O  
9
Reboot the unit  
Rebooting the unit remotely using TUI menu  
Tests and diagnostics selection menu.  
Diagnostics  
9A  
9B  
9C  
Physical Layer Diagnostics  
Link Layer Diagnostics  
E1 Net testing by patterns, loop, selecting loop codes on/off.  
Menu for In-band testing.  
Delay Monitoring  
Configuration  
Configuration for Delay Monitoring. Results are displayed in Menu-3M.  
$
Routing Configuration  
Main router configuration menu  
$A  
Unit Routing configuration  
Configuration routing mode, default gateway IP address, enable Firewall,  
and Load balancing.  
$B  
$C  
$E  
Display routing table  
Static routing table  
View routing configuration tables (static and dynamic routes)  
Configure static routes.  
Routing Command Line  
Interface (CLI)  
Allows you to configure the dynamic routing protocols (RIP1, RIP2, and  
OSPF) See “Kernel Command Reference” on page 164.  
$F  
Display ARP Table  
View ARP cache table.  
$H  
Firewall Table  
Configure access lists.  
112  
SALES: 0118 965 5100  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table D-1 Router Menus (5 of 5)  
Menu  
Number Name  
Description  
Page  
$IA  
$IB  
Static Frame Relay Map  
config  
Configure manually DLCI to IP address mappings. See “Configuring Frame  
Relay DLCIs” on page 33  
Display active Frame Relay View current DLCI to IP address mappings. If inverse ARP is enabled on an  
Map Table  
interface, DLCI to IP address mappings is automatically learnt.  
Manually configured mappings are also displayed on this menu.  
$JA  
$JB  
$JC  
$JE  
NAP/NAPT configuration -  
Global Map table  
Configure global IP addresses and mapping to network interfaces. See  
“Configuring NAT” on page 54  
NAP/NAPT configuration -  
Static table  
Assign manually global IP addresses to local hosts. See “Configuring NAT”  
on page 54  
NAP/NAPT configuration -  
Local address table  
Configure local networks requiring NAT. “NAT Configuration menus” on  
page 54  
NAT Configuration  
Enable or disable unit NAT configuration.  
Enable/Disable NAT, overloading (NAPT) per network interface.  
$JF  
$K  
NAT Dynamic entries  
DHCP configuration  
Displays current global IP addresses allocated through NAT.  
Enable/Disable DHCP relay and configure DHCP relay server IP address  
Table D-2 Menu-0A - Interface configuration  
Parameter  
UNIT  
Parameter—Options ; Definition  
In-band monitoring  
Enables or disables in-band monitoring.  
Traffic Type  
Set WAN protocol to PPP or Frame Relay.  
The selected WAN protocol applies to all WAN interfaces. In PPP mode all the TUI  
menus will be configured for PPP operations. In Frame Relay mode all the TUI menus  
will be configured for Frame Relay or Multilink Frame Relay operations.  
Multilink Protocol  
• Select Yes to enable multilink PPP (MLPPP) or multilink Frame Relay (MFR)  
according to the selected traffic type set above. Both T1/E1 links will be bonded as a  
single virtual connection and will be identified as bundle0.  
• Select No to enable independent E1 links. The two E1 links will be identified as  
NET1 and NET2.  
COMM  
IP Address  
Set the COMM port IP Address in standard IP form (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn).  
Len  
Set the IP mask  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Parameter  
ENET  
Parameter—Options ; Definition  
IP Address/Len  
Set the Ethernet port IP Address in standard IP form (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn).  
Len  
Set the subnet mask (1 to 32) which is the part of the IP address shared by all  
devices on the same network  
ICMP Redirect  
Enable or disable sending ICMP Redirect message on ENET interface  
NET1  
NET2  
IP Address/Len  
Set the first network port IP address that is responded to for in-band traffic received  
from the NET1, in standard IP form (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn).  
Len  
Set the IP mask  
IP Address/Len  
Set the second network IP address that is responded to for in-band traffic received from  
the NET2, in standard IP form (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn).  
Len  
Set the IP mask  
Table D-3 Menu-0B SNMP Configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
COMMUNITY  
Get  
Enter an alphanumeric text string (max—32 characters). The router SNMP agent uses  
this text string to check GET requests for the SNMP configuration from the SNMP  
management station.  
Default: public  
COMMUNITY  
Set  
Enter an alphanumeric text string (max—32 characters). The router SNMP agent uses  
this text string to check SET requests from the SNMP management station to set the  
SNMP configuration.  
Default: public  
COMMUNITY  
Trap  
Enter an alphanumeric text string (max—32 characters) which the router SNMP agent  
inserts in SNMP traps it sends to the SNMP management stations  
Default: public  
TRAP  
Enter the IP address of the first Network Management Server. The router sends trap  
1st NMS IP Address  
messages to this server.  
Default: 0.0.0.0  
TRAP  
2nd NMS IP Address  
Enter the IP address of the second Network Management Server. The router sends trap  
messages to this server.  
TRAP  
3rd NMS IP Address  
Enter the IP address of the third Network Management Server. The router sends trap  
messages to this server.  
Note: If all three trap NMS IP addresses are set, the router sends a trap to all three  
network management servers.  
TRAP  
COMM, ENET, NET  
1st Output Port  
Selects the DLCI (if applicable) and port over which the router will send a trap to the  
1st NMS IP address.  
114  
SALES: 0118 965 5100  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table D-3 Menu-0B SNMP Configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
TRAP  
COMM, ENET, NET  
2nd Output Port  
Selects the DLCI (if applicable) and port over which the router will send a trap to the  
2nd NMS IP address.  
TRAP  
COMM, ENET, NET  
3rd Output Port  
Selects the DLCI (if applicable) and port over which the router will send a trap to the  
2nd NMS IP address.  
Table D-4 Menu-0C Ethernet Configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
MAC Address  
Data speed mode  
ProxyARP  
Read-only Ethernet port MAC address assigned at factory.  
Ethernet port speed 10MB/Half (default) or 10MB/Full  
Reserved for IP Fast Forwarding mode. This feature is no longer supported.  
Enable or disable ProxyARP in Fast forwarding mode. Default is disabled.  
Net directed broadcast  
mode  
Reserved for IP Fast Forwarding mode. This feature is no longer supported.  
Configurable option available in Fast Forwarding mode only. Enter the network  
directed broadcast IP address mask  
Fwd Multicast  
Reserved for IP Fast Forwarding mode. This feature is no longer supported.  
Configurable option available in Fast Forwarding mode only. Enable or disable  
forwarding mulcast packets.  
Table D-5 Menu-0E Performance Monitoring Configuration  
Parameter  
Interface  
DLCI  
Parameter - Options; Definition  
The network interface (NET1, NET2, or NET) to which the DLCI is attached  
DLCIs will be autodiscovered if LMI is enabled on menu-0F. If LMI is not enabled, the  
DLCIs must be entered manually on this table.  
To change a DLCI status to Deleted, enter a zero for the DLCI number. If LMI is  
enabled, and the DLCI still exists, it will be discovered again and its status returned toa  
active.  
Default: 0  
CIR  
The Committed information rate. If LMI revision 1 is being used, this will be  
discovered; otherwise, you will need to enter the CIR for each DLCI  
Default: 0  
Delay Threshold  
The range is 0 to 64000 milliseconds. When the round trip delay over the PVC exceeds  
this value:  
• An event will be registered in the Event Log  
• A trap will be sent to the NMS (if configured)  
• An alarm message will be displayed on the terminal user interface  
• A delay threshold violation is counted  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table D-5 Menu-0E Performance Monitoring Configuration  
Parameter  
Parameter - Options; Definition  
Status  
Active - Passing data through the Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC)  
Inactive - PVC is broken  
Deleted - PVC is not available  
Table D-6 Menu-0F LMI Configuration  
Parameter  
Enable  
Parameter- Options; Definition  
Enable or disable LMI  
Type  
Select between Annex A, Annex D, and LMI revision 1.  
Default: Annex D  
Enquiry Tx Timer  
Sets the interval between STATUS ENQUIRY messages. Set the value between 5 and  
30 seconds, in increments of 5.  
Default: 10 seconds  
Full status count  
Max Lmi Error  
Enquiry Rx Timer  
Sets the number of polling cycles for Link Verification before the unit generates the  
Full Status request. Set the count to an integer between 1 and 255  
The number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before the reporting that the  
interface is down.  
Sets the number of seconds between the sending of a STATUS ENQUIRY and the  
reception of the response. Set this value to an integer between 5 and 30, in increments  
of 5.  
Default: 15 seconds  
Unit Location  
Select UNI-U or UNI-N.  
Table D-7 Menu-0H SLA Configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
Enable -  
Set this field to Enabled to collect SLA data  
Default: Disabled  
FDR/DDR Sample  
Period  
Set the sampling period between 1 minute and 255 minutes. The time period represents  
the time interval between requests to the far end of the PVC.  
Default: 1  
FDR Threshold  
Set this threshold between 0% and 100%. 0% means this feature is disabled.  
Configurable to one thousandth of a percent (for example, 99.999%). When the FDR  
falls below this threshold:  
• An event is sent to the Event Log  
• A trap will be sent to the NMS (if configured)  
• An alarm message will be displayed on the Terminal User Interface  
• An FDR threshold violation is counted0%  
Default: 0%  
116  
SALES: 0118 965 5100  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table D-7 Menu-0H SLA Configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
DDR Threshold  
Set this threshold between 0% and 100%. 0% means that this feature is disabled.  
Configurable to one thousandth of a percent (for example, 99.999%). When the DDR  
falls below this threshold:  
• An event is sent to the Event Log  
• A trap will be sent to the NMS (if configured)  
• An alarm message will be displayed on the Terminal User Interface  
• A DDR threshold violation is counted0%  
Default: 0%  
Delay Period  
Set the Delay Period between 1 minute and 255 minutes. This figure represents the  
time interval between delay measurements on each PVC.  
Default: 1  
Delay Packet Size  
Set the Delay Packet Size between 50 bytes and 1500 bytes. This figure represents the  
size of Request and REsponse packets used to measure delay.  
Default: 128  
Table D-8 Main-1 Status  
Parameter  
Description  
Unit status  
Indicates the Dual Trunk E1 Router is operating normally, or if any special  
conditions exist.  
Network status  
Ethernet status  
Displays information on the condition of the received T1 or E1 signal.  
Indicates if the Ethernet link is up or down.  
Link1/Link 2 status  
Indicates the status, up or down, of the network link 1(NET1) and network  
link 2 (NET2).  
Table D-9 Menu-1 Unit Status (1 of 2)  
Indication  
Description  
Normal  
No abnormal conditions exist.  
Unit is running self test.  
Unit is in network loopback.  
Unit is in payload loopback.  
Unit is sending User 1 pattern.  
Self Test  
Net Lpbk (port)  
PLD Lpbk (port, fraction)  
Send User 1 (port, fraction)  
port = Net1 or Net2  
Send User 2 (port, fraction)  
Send 1:1 (port, fraction)  
Send 1:2 (port, fraction)  
Send 1:4 (port, fraction)  
Send 1:7 (port, fraction)  
Send 3:24 (port, fraction)  
Unit is sending User 2 pattern.  
Unit is sending alternate 1s and 0s.  
Unit is sending standard loopdown remote code continuously.  
Unit is sending standard loopup remote code continuously.  
Unit is sending 1:7 pattern.  
Unit is sending 3:24 pattern.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table D-9 Menu-1 Unit Status (2 of 2)  
Indication  
Description  
Send QRW (port, fraction)  
Send All 1s (port, fraction)  
Send all 0s (port, fraction)  
LP UP Remote (port, fraction)  
LP DN Remote (port, fraction)  
No clock  
Unit is sending QRW code.  
Unit is sending all ones signal.  
Unit is sending all zeros signal.  
Unit is sending loopdown code to remote site for 15 seconds.  
Unit is sending loopup code to remote site for 15 seconds.  
Main clock source has failed.  
Lamp Test  
Unit is undergoing Lamp Test.  
Table D-10Menu-1 Network Status  
Description  
Indication  
Normal Operation  
Loss of Signal  
No abnormal conditions exist.  
Network signal is missing.  
Network frame is missing.  
AIS/keep alive.  
Loss of Frame  
AIS Alarm Received  
RAI Alarm Received  
Set Code Received  
Reset Code Received  
Excessive CRC Errors  
Excessive OOF Errors  
Unit has received RAI  
Unit has received set code.  
Unit has received reset code.  
Unit has exceeded BPV threshold.  
Unit has exceeded OOF threshold.  
Table D-11 Menu-3A Carrier Reports and 3B User Reports  
Event  
Default  
Unavailable Signal State - In ESF mode, this state is declared at the onset of ten consecutive  
No  
SESs.  
Current Interval Timer - Displays the amount to time in a current interval, 0 - 899 seconds.  
0
0
Errored Seconds (ES) - In ESF framing, a second with one or more ESF frame errors or CRC-  
6 errors.  
Unavailable Seconds (UAS) - In ESF mode, the number of seconds elapsed after 10 consecutive  
SES events are received.  
0
0
0
Severely Errored Seconds (SES) - In ESF mode, a second during which 320 or more CRC-6  
violations or OOF events have occurred.  
Bursty Errored Seconds (BES) - In ESF mode, a second with two CRC-6 errors to 320 CRC-6  
errors.  
Background Block Error (BBE) -  
118  
SALES: 0118 965 5100  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table D-11 Menu-3A Carrier Reports and 3B User Reports  
Event  
Default  
Loss of Frame Count (LOFC) - In ESF mode, the number of times Loss of Frame is detected.  
0
0
Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS) - In ESF mode, the number of seconds in an interval in which a  
controlled slip occurred.  
Table D-123C Inband reports  
Event  
Default  
Seconds in interval - elapsed time, in seconds  
(counter)  
FCS (Frame Check Sequence) - current count of the number of frames that have arrived with  
(counter)  
FCS errors.  
Overrun - overrun condition is detected by receiver. If receiver is unable to receive frames,  
because it does not have buffers to place the received frames. This condition occurs if  
the frames are received at a very high rate.  
(counter)  
Errored Seconds - a second with one or more frame errors  
Discarded frames - current count of thrown-away data blocks  
Received packets - current count of arrived data packets  
Received octets - current count of arrived data bits  
(counter)  
(counter)  
(counter)  
(counter)  
(value)  
Received Usage - the octet arrival rate as the percentage of the link speed.  
RxUsage = (rxOctets•B)•100/dataRate•timeInterval)  
Transmitted packets - current count of sent data blocks  
Transmitted octets - current count of sent data bits  
(counter)  
(counter)  
(value)  
Transmitted Usage - the octet transmission rate as the percentage of the link speed.  
TxUsage = (txOctets•B)•100/dataRate•timeInterval)  
Table D-13Menu-3EA DLCI Outages  
Indication  
DLCI  
Description  
Identifies the DLCI.  
Outage State  
Included Outage  
Outage State may be Included, Excluded, or None.  
These columns present data collected on unscheduled service outages. The Count  
column provides the number of INcluded outages on the DLCI since the last reset.  
The Time column provides the number of unscheduled minutes the DLCI was down.  
Excluded Outage  
These columns present data collected on outages that are scheduled or unavoidable.  
These outages include down time scheduled for maintenance, and down time  
attributable to acts of nature such as flood. The Count column provides the number  
of Excluded outages on the DLCI since the last reset. The Time column provides the  
number of minutes the DLCI was down due to an Excluded outage.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table D-14Menu-3EB Frame Transfer Delays Report Definition  
Indication  
Description  
DLCI  
Identifies the DLCI.  
Last Sample Time  
Threshold Violations  
Total Samples  
Average Delay  
The time of the most recent sample.  
The number of times the delay threshold has been exceeded.  
The number of samples that have been taken.  
Average Delay is calculated by taking the sum of the total delay and dividing it by  
the number of samples collected.  
Maximum Delay, Last n  
Samples  
This column is subdivided into three columns. Here you will find the single longest  
delay during the last 15 samples, 30 samples, and 60 samples.  
Table D-15Menu-3EC Local Transmit Data Delivery Report Definitions  
Indication  
DLCI  
Description  
Identifies the DLCI.  
Last Sample Time  
The time of the most recent sample.  
Threshold Violations  
The number of times the DDR threshold has been exceeded.  
The number of bytes transmitted within CIR.  
Local Transmit Within  
CIR  
Local Transmit Above  
CIR  
The number of bytes transmitted above CIR.  
Far End Within CIR  
Receive Above CIR  
Number of bytes received at far end within CIR.  
Number of bytes received at far end in excess of CIR.  
Table D-16Menu-3EE Local Receive Data Delivery Report Definitions  
Indication  
DLCI  
Description  
Identifies the DLCI.  
Last Sample Time  
The time of the most recent sample.  
Threshold Violations  
The number of times the DDR threshold has been exceeded.  
Local Receive Within CIR The number of bytes received within CIR.  
Local Receive Above CIR The number of bytes transmitted above CIR.  
Far End Transmit Within  
CIR  
Number of bytes transmitted within CIR from the far end.  
Number of bytes transmitted in excess of CIR from the far end.  
Far End Transmit Above  
CIR  
120  
SALES: 0118 965 5100  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table D-17Menu-3EF Local Transmit Frame Relay Delivery Report  
Indication  
DLCI  
Description  
Identifies the DLCI.  
Last Sample Time  
The time of the most recent sample.  
Threshold Violations  
The number of times the DDR threshold has been exceeded.  
The number of frames transmitted within CIR.  
Local Transmit Within  
CIR  
Local Transmit Above  
CIR  
The number of frames transmitted above CIR.  
Far End Within CIR  
Receive Above CIR  
Number of frames received at far end within CIR.  
Number of frames received at far end in excess of CIR.  
Table D-18 Menu-3EG Local Receive Frame Delivery Report  
Indication  
DLCI  
Description  
Identifies the DLCI.  
Last Sample Time  
The time of the most recent sample.  
Threshold Violations  
The number of times the DDR threshold has been exceeded.  
The number of frames transmitted within CIR.  
Local Transmit Within  
CIR  
Local Transmit Above  
CIR  
The number of frames transmitted above CIR.  
Far End Within CIR  
Receive Above CIR  
Number of frames received at far end within CIR.  
Number of frames received at far end in excess of CIR.  
Table D-19 Menu-3FA Ethernet physical layer  
Parameter  
Description  
FCS Errors  
FCS errors  
Single Collisions  
Defer Transmit  
Late Collisions  
Carrier Sense Errors  
Frames Too Long  
Total number of single collisions  
Total number of deferred transmissions  
Total number of late collisions  
Total number of carrier sense errors  
Total number of frames received that are too long  
Table D-20 Menu-3FB Ethernet interface statistics  
Parameter  
Description  
Octets Received  
Total number of octets received  
Total number of octets transmitted  
Octets Transmitted  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Parameter  
Description  
Unicast Packets Received  
Unicast Packets Transmitted  
Non Unicast Packets Received  
Non Unicast Packets Transmitted  
Unknown Protocol ID  
Total number of unicast packets received  
Total number of unicast packets transmitted  
Total number of non-unicast packets received  
Total number of non-unicast packets transmitted  
Protocol ID unknown  
Protocol Packet Dump  
Unroutable Packets  
Total number of Rx packets received with Ethernet errors  
Total number of unroutable packets received  
Table D-21 Menu-3FC IP Statistics  
Parameter  
Description  
Packets Received  
Total number of packets received  
Header Errors Received  
Address Errors Received  
Forwarded Datagrams  
Unknown Protocol Received  
Discards <Rx>  
Total number of packet header errors  
Total number of packet address errors  
Total number of forwarded datagrams  
Total number of packet unknown protocols  
Total number of packet discards received  
Total number of packet discards transmitted  
Total number of In-band packets received  
Total number of requests transmitted  
Discards <Tx>  
Packets Delivered  
Requests Transmitted  
Reassembly Required  
Reassembly Successful  
Reassembly Failed  
Total number of packet fragments requiring reassembly  
Total number of successful packet reassemblies  
Total number of failed packet reassemblies  
Total number of successfully fragmented IP packets  
Total number of packet fragments failed  
Total number of packet fragments created  
Fragmentation Successful  
Fragmentation Failed  
Fragments Created  
Table D-22 Menu-3FE ICMP receive statistics  
Parameter  
Description  
Messages Received  
Total number of messages  
Errors Received  
Total number of packet header errors  
Total number of unreachable destination messages  
Total number of packets with time exceeded  
Total number of packets with parameter problems  
Total number of packets with source Quenches  
Total number of packet redirects  
Destination Unreachable (Rx)  
Time Exceeded (Rx)  
Parameter Problems (Rx)  
Source Quench (Rx)  
Redirects (Rx)  
122  
SALES: 0118 965 5100  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Parameter  
Description  
Echos (Rx)  
Total number of packet echo requests  
Echo Replies (Rx)  
TimeStamps (Rx)  
TimeStamp Replies (Rx)  
Address Masks (Rx)  
Address Mask Replies (Rx)  
Total number of packet echo replies  
Total number of packet timestamp requests  
Total number of packet timestamp replies  
Total number of packet address masks requests  
Total number of packet address masks replies  
Table D-23 Menu-3FF ICMP Transmit statistics  
Parameter  
Description  
Messages Transmitted  
Errors Transmitted  
Destination Unreachable <Tx>  
Time Exceeded <Tx>  
Parameter Problems <Tx>  
Source Quench <Tx>  
Redirects <Tx>  
Total number of messages  
Total number of errors  
Total number of packets with unreachable destinations  
Total number of packets with time exceeded  
Total number of packets with parameter problems  
Total number of packet source Quenches  
Total number of packet redirects  
Echos <Tx>  
Total number of packet echo requests  
Total number of packet echo replies  
Total number of packet timestamp requests  
Total number of packet timestamp replies  
Total number of packet address masks requests  
Total number of packet address masks replies  
Echo Replies <Tx>  
TimeStamps <Tx>  
TimeStamp Replies <Tx>  
Address Masks <Tx>  
Address Mask Replies>  
Table D-24 Menu-3FG ARP Statistics  
Parameter  
Description  
Requests Received <All> Total number of ARP requests received  
Requests Received <For  
Me>  
Total number of requests received from me  
Replies Sent  
Total number of ARP replies sent  
Total number of ARP replies received  
Total number of ARP requests sent  
Replies Received  
Requests Sent  
Table D-25 Menu-3M Delay Monitoring  
Indication  
Avg  
Description  
Average delay in milliseconds  
Maximum delay  
Max  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Indication  
Lost  
Description  
number of packets lost  
Bad  
number of packets with checksum errors.  
number of packets transmitted  
Set  
Table D-26 Menu-3Z Event Log  
Parameter Description  
Default  
Module  
Unit, Network, System, All  
All  
This field allows the display of any of the above status changes.  
When Unit is selected, the following status changes will be logged as  
events:  
Event  
Unit Power On  
Self Test  
Net Loopback (port)  
Payload Loopback (port, fraction)  
Loop Up Remote (port, fraction)  
Loop Down Remote (port, fraction)  
Send User 1 Pattern (port, fraction)  
Send User 2 Pattern (port, fraction)  
Send 1:1 Pattern (port, fraction)  
Send 1:2 Pattern (port, fraction)  
Send 1:4 Pattern (port, fraction)  
Send 1:7 Pattern (port, fraction)  
Send 3:24 Pattern (port, fraction)  
Send QRW Pattern (port, fraction)  
Send All 1’s Pattern (port, fraction)  
Send All 0’s Pattern (port, fraction)  
No Clock  
Lamp Test  
Send Keep Alive  
Controlled Slip  
Inject a Pattern Error  
Clear Pattern Error Counter  
Clear Event Log  
Clr Current Carrier Registers  
Clear Carrier Archives  
Clear Current User Registers  
Clear User Archives  
Clear User CRC Errors  
Clear User BPV Errors  
Clear User OOF Errors  
Clear All User Error Counters  
Clear 24 Hour User Registers  
Back to Factory Config  
124  
SALES: 0118 965 5100  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Parameter Description  
Default  
Event (cont.) Loss of Signal  
Loss of Frame  
Set Code Received  
Reset Code Received  
UA1 Received  
CV Threshold Exceeded  
FE Threshold Exceeded  
CRC Threshold Exceeded  
External ALarm Asserted  
Power Outage  
UAS Outage  
Flash N.V. Log Error  
Clear User 4 Day Archive  
Clear User 14 Day Totals  
Module  
When All is selected, all of the preceding status changes will be logged as  
events.  
When Network is selected, the following status changes will be logged as  
events:  
Network  
Loss of Signal  
Loss of Frame  
Set Code Received  
Reset Code Received  
BPV Threshold Exceeded  
CRC Threshold Exceeded  
OOF Threshold Exceeded  
When AUX is selected, the following status changes will be logged as  
events:  
Loss of Signal  
Loss of Frame  
Module  
Event  
When System is selected, the following status changes will be logged as  
events.  
External Alarm  
Power Supply Failure  
This field allows a particular type of event to be displayed  
Enter an event index or use the Up/Down keys to scroll through the event  
options. While selecting the event, the event description text changes with  
the index. The event description text is displayed under the Description  
column in the Event Log menu.  
0, All  
If the Event field is left blank, the Event filter parameter is disabled.  
Seq. No.  
Status  
This value uniquely identifies an event in a certain unit. This field is read  
only.  
Identifies the condition of the event described in the description field. This  
field is read-only.  
Module  
Identifies the module type. This field is read-only.  
Description  
Identifies the status change/event. This field is read-only.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Parameter Description  
Default  
Time/Date  
Identifies the time the status change/event was logged.  
Table D-27Menu-4A Unit Configuration  
Parameter  
UNIT  
Description  
Protect Mode - Enabled or Disabled;  
Enabled - Protect mode prevents you from running tests from the front  
panel.  
Yellow Alarm - Enabled or Disabled;  
Enabled - The unit detects and generates a Yellow Alarm.  
Disabled - The unit does not detect or generate a Yellow Alarm.  
NETWORK  
Main/Alt Sync - INT, NET1, NET2  
Selects the E1 network transmitter’s clock source. First specify the Main  
clock source value, then the Alternate. (Each clock source has the same  
options.)  
Type yto confirm each action.  
NET: Select this option if the network is the clock source. If it is not, set to  
Int at one E1 end, and NET at the other end.  
Table D-28Menu-4B Net Configuration and status  
Parameter  
NET 1/2  
Description  
Framing  
Selects the Network T1/E1 framing format.  
E1: CRC4 enabled, CRC4 disabled, and unstructured  
(
Line Impedence  
View setting of E1 line impedence (75 ohm or 120 ohm)  
Table D-29Menu-4T GMT Time synchronization  
Parameter  
Time/Date  
Description  
Automatic Sync  
Set automatic synchronization to Enabled or Disabled.  
Default: Disabled  
How Often  
Set the frequency of how often to synchronize the time with the time server (Days,  
hours, minutes, seconds)  
Next sync  
Time Src  
Displays synchronization count down and next scheduled synchronization  
Configure primary and secondary time server IP addresses and port of which time  
servers are connected  
Attempts  
Displays count of access attempts to time server  
126  
SALES: 0118 965 5100  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table D-30Menu-4V Timezone configuration  
Parameter  
Description  
Ahead GMT  
Set this to Yes if unit is deployed to the east of GMT. Set NO if the unit is deployed  
in to the west of GMT.  
Hrs. Offset From GMT  
Mins. Offset From GMT  
DST  
Offset hours from GMT from 0 to 23  
Offer minutes from GMT from 0 to 59l  
Enable or disable Daylight Savings Time. Set to Enable If user’s timezone supports  
Daylight Savings Time.  
Hrs. of Difference during Number of hours saved during Daylight Savings Time  
DST  
Mins. of difference during Number of minutes saved during Daylight Savings Time  
DST  
DST Start week  
DST Start month  
Week of the month in which Daylight Savings Time starts  
Month when Daylight Savings Time starts.  
Table D-31Menu-6A PPP/MLPPP Configuration Parameters  
Parameter  
Description  
Keepalive Timer  
Controls the messages of the keepalive (echo request) messages after the link(s)  
is(are) negotiated  
Keepalive Timeout  
Retry Counter  
Controls how long an end point should wait for “ech response” after ending “echo  
request”  
How many unsuccessful “echo requests” should be attempted before a link is  
declared down  
Table D-32Menu-6A Multilink Frame Relay Configuration Parameters  
Paramete  
r
Description  
Default  
10  
MFR  
Link Integrity Timer - controls rate of MFR protocol messages  
Link Acknowledge - controls rate of MFR protocol acknowledgement messages  
Retry Counter - number of retransmission attempts for MFR protocol  
Discarded Frames - (status) number of invalid MFR frames discarded  
Local Bundle Identifier - (status) local identifier for logical T1 bundle  
Remote Bundle Identifier - (status) remote identifier for logical T1 bundle  
4
2
(counter)  
(ID no.)  
(ID no.)  
Local  
Table D-33Menu-6B PPP/MLPPP Port Status  
Parameter  
Port 1/2  
Description  
Include In Service - Yes, No  
Status - Normal, Idle, Down, and Loopback Detected  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Parameter  
Description  
Protocol Error - Number of PPP/MLPPP protocol errors detected in this port.  
Table D-34Menu-6B Multilink Frame Relay Port Configuration and Status  
Paramete  
r
Description  
Include In Bundle - Yes, No  
Default  
Yes  
Port 1/2  
Status - Normal, Idle, Down, Remote Not Configured, Inconsistent Bundle,  
Unknown Vendor, Loopback Detected, Test Active, Remote Link Up, and Awaiting  
Remote Link  
(status)  
Protocol Errors - number of MFR protocol errors detected on the port  
Local Bundle Identifier - (status) local identifier for logical T1 bundle  
Remote Bundle Identifier - (status) remote identifier for logical T1 bundle  
(counter)  
(ID no.)  
(ID no.)  
Local  
Table D-35Menu-7 Feature Keys  
Parameter  
Default  
RMON – PPP and Frame Relay RMON1 statistics  
Service Level Agreement (Frame Relay SLA FRF.13)  
RMON 2 - Protocols and application monitoring  
Access Router 2 Ports –  
Capable  
Capable  
Capable  
Capable  
Not capable  
Capable  
Access Router single port  
Dynamic Routing --  
Table D-36Alarm Configuration  
Primary  
Parameter—Options;  
Parameters Definition  
Default  
NET Alarms Block All AlarmsYes, No  
Yes—Blocks the reporting of all alarms.  
No—Enables the unit to report alarms.  
No  
Carrier Loss Alarm—Enabled, Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled—The unit generates an alarm when a network carrier Loss of  
Signal is detected on the network.  
Disabled—Disables the alarm.  
Sync Loss Alarm—Enabled, Disabled  
Enabled—The unit generates an alarm when loss-of-frame is detected on Enabled  
the network.  
Disabled—Disables the alarm.  
128  
SALES: 0118 965 5100  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Primary  
Parameter—Options;  
Parameters Definition  
Default  
NET Alarms AIS Received Alarm—Enabled, Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled—The unit generates an alarm when a Network AIS (Alarm  
Indication Signal) is detected.  
Disabled—Disables the alarm.  
RAI Received Alarm—Enabled, Disabled  
Enabled—The unit generates an alarm when a Network RAI Alarm is  
detected.  
Enabled  
Disabled—Disables the alarm.  
Table D-37Menu-8C Miscellaneous Management Configuration  
Parameter—Options; Definitions  
Connection—In-band, Modem, Direct  
Select the type of connection you are using.  
In-band—Enables an in-band connection to the unit.  
Modem—Enables a modem connection to the unit.  
Direct—Enables a direct terminal connection to unit.  
Timeout When Logged On—1 Min, 10 Min, 30 Min, Unlimited  
Applies only when you are logged on. This is the time span after which, if it does not  
detect activity, the system warns that you will be logged off in 30 seconds.  
Timeout When Not Logged On—1 Min, 10 Min, 30 Min, Unlimited  
Applies only when a terminal is connected through a modem and you are not logged  
on.This is the time span after which the modem disconnects the phone line if no  
activity is detected.  
Phone Number 1  
Enter a Hayes-compatible modem dial string (20 char. maximum); for example,  
“atdt555-1212”. The modem dials out using the first telephone number, then  
automatically tries the second telephone number if the first does not respond.  
Phone Number 2  
Enter a Hayes-compatible modem dial string (20 char. maximum); for example,  
“atdt555-1212”.  
Normal User Password—(text string)  
Enter the login password for the Normal User (20 char. maximum).  
Super User Password—(text string)  
Enter the login password for the Super User (20 char. maximum).  
DLC IBC Link Loss Alarm—Enabled or Disabled  
The IBC link specific to Dual Trunk E1 Router. When the connection is disrupted,  
an alarm is sent.  
Dial Out Time Interval—Dial out time interval is the minimum amount of time the  
Dual Trunk E1 Router waits between dial outs to the host computer.  
In-band Link Loss Alarm—Enabled or Disabled  
Enabled—When loss of HDLC frames or idle characters occurs, an alarm is generated.  
Disabled—The alarm is disabled  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Parameter—Options; Definitions  
In-band CRC Error Threshold—Enable or Disabled  
Enabled—The valid range for this is 4 x 10-7 to 9 x 10-1.  
Disabled—No alarm is generated if threshold rate of errors is high.  
Table D-38Menu-8E Modem Initialization Strings  
Parameter  
Default  
N/A  
String 1 – Modem initialization string can be up to 20 characters.  
String 2 – Modem initialization string can be up to 60 characters.  
N/A  
Table D-39Menu-8F Comm Port configuration  
Parameter  
Default  
COMM PORT – Baud Rate  
Parity  
38400  
None  
Word Length  
Stop Bits  
8
2
DCD – Enabled or Disabled  
Disabled  
Enabled – The Multilink Select uses the modem’s Data Carrier Detect (DCD)  
signal to provide more robust modem operation.  
Disabled – Use Disabled if your null modem does not pass the Data Carrier  
Detect signal.  
XON/XOFF – Disabled, XOFF until ANY, XOFF until XON  
XOFF until ANY – Ctrl-S stops data flow from unit, any key resumes data  
flow.  
Disabled  
XOFF until XON – Ctrl stops data flow from unit, Ctrl-Q resumes flow.  
Disabled – XON/XOFF feature disabled.  
Table D-40Menu-9A Physical layer diagnostics  
Field  
Definition — Options  
Default  
Choosing a test by number  
You may type in a number to select a test, instead of using  
the arrow keys. For instance, if you type in “3,” you will  
select the Net Lpbk test.  
Current Test  
Pattern Test  
Displays the test currently running. If no test is selected, the Idle  
field reads Idle.  
If no pattern test is running, the test reads idle. When a  
pattern test is started, it will read Searching. When the  
current pattern test is locked, it displays locked  
seconds. Locked secondsis a 16-bit counter  
saturating at 65536. The counter resets to 0 when the  
current pattern is lost. The counter label will change to  
Relocked Secondsif the current pattern is lost and  
found again.  
Options: Idle, Searching, Locked, and Relocked  
130  
SALES: 0118 965 5100  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Field  
Definition — Options  
Default  
Pattern Error Counter  
The number of pattern errors occurring during the current  
test. This will only display when Pattern Test reads  
Locked Secondsor Relocked Seconds.  
0
CRC (or CRC4) Errors  
Code Violations  
The number of CRC (or CRC4) errors occurring during the  
current test.  
0
0
0
0
The number of Code Violations occurring during the  
current test.  
Out of Frame Event  
Indicates 2 bits out of 4 bits framing errors for both ESF  
and D4 modes  
Frame Error Event  
Last Self Test Result  
Indicates 2 bits out of 4 bits framing errors  
The result of the last test performed. Read only.  
0 (if no self-test  
has been  
Options:  
Self Test Passed  
Error nn (0 to 5)  
performed)  
Next Test (port, fraction)  
The next test to run is set in this field. Options:  
1. Self Test†  
Self Test  
3. Loop NET  
4. Loop Payload*  
5. Loop Up Remote *  
6. Loop Down Remote*  
7. QRW Pattern*  
8. 1:7 Pattern*  
9. 3:24 Pattern*  
10. 1:1 Pattern*  
11. All 1s Pattern*  
12. All 0s Pattern*  
13. 1:2 Pattern*  
14. 1:4 Pattern*  
15. User 1 Pattern*  
16. User 2 Pattern*  
17. Smart Jack Set‡  
18. Smart Jack Reset‡  
19. Lamp Test†  
*All of these tests offer the option of selecting which  
fraction of the T1/E1 signal the test applies to (NET1,  
NET2). FULL applies to the entire T1/E1 signal  
(including IDLE timeslots).  
Next Test Length  
The length of the next test is set in this field.  
15 min., 1 min., 60 min., Unlimited  
Unlimited  
With the Self Test, Loop Up Remote and Loop Down  
Remote, this parameter does not apply.  
Full Bandwidth Loop Code The Loop code to use in the next test is set in this field.  
Standard  
Standard  
Options: Standard, Alternate, Disabled  
Fractional Loop Code  
The Loop code to use in the next test is set in this field.  
Options: Standard, Alternate, Disabled, and ITU-T V.54  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Field  
Definition — Options  
Default  
USER 1 Pattern and USER Enter any sequence of 1s and 0s, between 1 and 24  
1 —  
2 Pattern  
characters in length. With D4 framing, make sure your  
pattern meets density requirements.  
001100110011001  
100110012—  
The parameters and options in the upper test status section 000100010001000  
of Menu-9 Diagnostics are given next. 10001000  
Table D-41Menu-9B Link Layer diagnostics options  
Type  
Parameter — Definition  
Default  
Current  
Test — The test that is currently running. Display only. Idle  
Link — The IP address, DLCI and Port on which the  
test is currently running. Display only.  
Empty  
Status  
Sent Packet — The number of packets sent in the  
0
current test. Display only.  
Received Packets — The number of packets received in  
0
the current test. Display only.  
Errored Packets — The number of packets containing  
errors sent in the current test. Display only.  
0
0
Status  
Missing Packets — The number of packets that were  
lost in the current test. Display only.  
Average Round Trip — The average length of the  
round trip from local to remote in the current test.  
Display only.  
0
132  
SALES: 0118 965 5100  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Type  
Next  
Parameter — Definition  
Default  
Test —  
Ping 511  
pattern  
Selects the type of test to run next.  
Options: Ping 511  
Ping 1023  
Ping 2047  
Ping 1:1  
Ping All 1s  
Ping All 0s  
IP Address — nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn  
0.0.0.0  
The IP address on which the test is to be run.  
DLCI, Port — The DLCI and Port out which the test is 16,NET  
to be run. The DLCI specified must be between 0 and  
1024. The port can be NET, DTE, ENET, and COMM.  
Test Length — The number of minutes the test is to  
last. Selecting a length of zero will choose unlimited  
duration.  
0
Test Interval — The number of seconds between test  
packets.  
0
Packet Size — The size of the packet sent in the test.  
100  
Table D-42Menu-9C Delay Monitoring configuration  
Parameter-Definition  
Default  
State  
Not Running  
(disabled)  
Enables or disables Delay Monitoring on the link.  
Pattern  
Ping 511 Pattern  
The test pattern in the ping packet.  
DLCI, Port  
16, NET  
The DLCI and Port on which the test is to be run.  
Port options: NET, DTE, Ethernet, and COMM.  
Test Interval  
60  
Interval size in seconds between transmission of test packets  
Packet Size  
100  
The size of the test packets.  
Table D-43Menu-$A Unit Configuration  
Primary  
Parameter–Options;  
Parameter Definition  
Default  
UNIT  
Packet Processing Mode – can be set to Fast Forwarding, Fast Forward Broadcast, or Routing  
Routing  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Primary  
Parameter–Options;  
Parameter Definition  
Default  
0.0.0.0  
Default Gateway IP Address - default IP address  
Default Gateway - enable or disable Gateway  
Firewall – enable or disable firewall  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Load Balancing – enable or disable Load Balancing  
Table D-44Menu-$B Display routing table  
Indication  
Description  
Destination IP/Len  
Next Hop IP  
Interface  
Destination IP or network address/length  
Next IP/network address along the route  
Interface (Self, ENET, MLPPP, PPP1, PPP2) on which packet will be sent  
Indicates type of route (Connect, Static)  
Flags  
Metric  
Distance to next Gateway enroute to destination IP  
Table D-45Menu-$C Static routing table parameters  
Indication  
Status  
Description  
Shows routes active or inactive  
Destination IP/Len  
Next Hop IP  
Interface  
Destination IP or network address  
Next IP/network address along route path  
Interface (Self, ENET, MLPPP, PPP1, PPP2) on which packet will be sent  
Distance to next gateway enroute to destination IP  
Add or delete route  
Metric  
Action  
Table D-46Menu-$F Display ARP Table  
Address  
Definition  
IP Address  
MAC Address  
Address for client or server station (0.0.0.0)  
Address for LAN network card  
Table D-47Menu-$H Firewall table  
Indication  
Ord  
Definition  
Order number in which packet is processed  
Permit or Deny - processing of packet is either permitted or denied  
Packet source address/length  
Action  
Src Address/Len  
Dest Address/Len  
SrcIntf  
Packet destination address/length  
Packet source interface (ENET, MLPPP, PPP1, PPP2)  
134  
SALES: 0118 965 5100  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Indication  
Status  
Definition  
Status is either Active or Inactive. Press the “k” key (see bottom of screen) to save  
the Status to the Firewall Table.  
Table D-48Menu-$K DHCP Relay configuration  
Parameter  
DHCP Relay  
DHCP Server  
Definition  
Enable or disable DHCP relay agent  
DHCP Server IP address  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
136  
SALES: 0118 965 5100  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Router Command Line Interface Reference E  
ACCESS TO ROUTER COMMAND LINE  
The Dual Trunk router command line interface (CLI) is accessible manually via TUI and  
programmatically for configuring the router automatically.  
For manual configuration and troubleshooting, access the CLI via the TUI Menu-$E directly  
through the COMM port, or Telnet via the Ethernet or the WAN ports. You enter the commands one  
line at a time using the command syntax outlined in this appendix.  
Configuring the router automatically  
You can manage your router configurations using configuration files. Retrieve the complete router  
configuration onto an ASCII text file and store it on a server for backup. Make changes to the  
router configuration file off-line then download it either manually or automatically. The following  
table lists the procedures for retrieving and saving, and downloading router configuration files..  
Table E-1 Router automatic configuration procedures  
Procedure  
Steps  
Retrieving and saving the router  
configuration to a file  
To retrieve the router configuration file, you will need to access  
the router TUI, display the router configuration on the Terminal  
or Telnet session, then cut and paste to an ASCII text file.  
1.Select Menu-8X from the TUI  
2.Enter B to select the command Display Configuration  
3.Enter Y to the prompt “Start Configuration Display (Y/N) ?”  
The router will display the complete router configuration  
using CLI commands  
4.From your Terminal Window or Telnet session, cut and paste  
the displayed router configuration to an ASCII text file, then  
save the file.  
Downloading router configuration  
manually  
You can download a router configuration file containing either a  
complete router configuration or partial changes to the router  
configuration.  
1.Select Menu-8X from the Terminal User Interface  
2.Select the download method TFTP or Xmodem  
3.Answer Y to the prompt “Do you really want to change to  
router configuration (Y/N) ?  
4.From your Workstation, select the router configuration file  
and start the TFTP or Xmodem download  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table E-1 Router automatic configuration procedures  
Procedure  
Steps  
Downloading router configuration  
automatically  
You can initiate the configuration file download  
programmatically using SNMP commands, and use TFTP or  
Xmodem method to download the file. Menu-8X Router auto  
configuration commands and options are accessible via SNMP  
variables in the eclipse MIB.  
The following shell script sample shows a TFTP download of a  
router configuration file called “site_a.txt”:  
#!/bin/ksh  
NODE="172.25.150.1"  
AUTO_FILE="site_a.txt"  
snmpset $NODE .1.3.6.1.4.1.300.200.2.50.1.0 integer 1  
tftp $NODE <<EOT  
bin  
put $AUTO_FILE  
quit  
EOT  
snmpget $NODE .1.3.6.1.4.1.300.200.2.50.10  
ROUTER COMMAND LINE HELP  
The CLI contains a text-based help facility. Access this help by typing in the full or partial command  
string then typing “?”. The CLI displays the command keywords or parameters for the command plus a  
short description.  
For example, at the CLI command prompt, type show? (the CLI does not display the question mark).  
The CLI displays this keyword list with short descriptions for each keyword:  
debugging Zebra configuration  
history  
Display the session command history  
interface Interface status and configuration  
ip  
IP information  
138  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
memory  
Table E-2 Router CLI Help  
Description  
Memory statistics  
Topic  
Syntax Help  
Use command ? to list commands or use List command to see available commands  
for each each mode.  
At the CLI command prompt type kernel:  
[Unit/Kernel/Rip/Ospf/Bpg]#kernel  
[Kernel(enable)]# sh ?  
Press TAB. The CLI shows:  
[Kernel(enable)]# show  
Type show i. Press TAB. The CLI shows:  
[Kernel(enable)]# show i  
interface ip  
[Kernel(enable)]# show i  
The CLI waits for your choice of the interfaceor ipparameters. Type nand  
press TAB. The CLI shows:  
[Kernel(config)]# show in  
[Kernel(config)]# show interface  
Type? and the CLI shows the list of parameters for the show interface  
command. This command has one positional parameter, an interface name.  
[IFNAME] Interface name  
[Kernel(enable)]> show interface  
The router waits for you to supply a value for the IFNAME parameter.  
Coomand abbreviations  
Command line errors  
The CLI accepts abbreviations for commands. For example,  
sh in  
is the abbreviation for the show interface command.  
If at any time the router does not recognize the command or parameter (check the  
position of a parameter) it displays this message:  
% Unknown command.  
If a command is incomplete it displays this message:  
% Command incomplete.  
Some commands are too long for the display line and can wrap in mid-parameter or  
mid-keyword if necessary:  
area 215.216.217.218 virtual-link 215.216.217.218 authentication-key 57393  
Command Negation  
In this example from the OSPF area virtual-linkcommand, nois  
optional. This means that the entire syntax can be negated. Depending on the  
command or the parameters, command negation can mean the disabling of one entire  
feature for the router or the disabling of that feature for a specific ID or address.  
(no) area AREAADDRESSID virtual-link ROUTERID  
(AUTHENTICATE|MSGD|INTERVAL)  
In this example negation is for the base command; the negated command does not  
take any parameters.  
default-metric <1-16777214>  
no default-metric  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Table E-2 Router CLI Help  
Topic  
Description  
Parameter expansion  
For the area virtual-link command, the AREAADDRESSID  
parameter is replaced by either an IP address or a number in the given range:  
AREAADDRESSID=A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>  
The minimum command then is:  
area 1.1.1.1 virtual-link 2.2.2.2  
The parameters in the string (AUTHENTICATE|MSGD|INTERVAL)are  
optional. Each one of which is replaced by more keywords and values.  
CLI Command Modes  
The commands available are divided in three categores (Unit, Kernel, and Routing) and arranged in  
a hierarchy. Each of the three modes has its own set of commands and its own sub modes of  
hierarchy.  
The commands available for each routing protocol (RIP and OSPF) are separated into several  
modes and arranged in a hierarchy. Enable is the default mode and is the lowest level. Each mode  
has its own special commands; in some modes, commands from a lower level are available..  
Table E-3 CLI command modes  
Mode  
Description  
Enable  
This mode is the base mode from where users can perform basic commands like show, exit,  
quit, help, list, enable. This mode also includes some debugging command, the save  
commands (for saving and viewing the configuration), show protocol specific information,  
and so on.  
Enable is the default mode.  
Configure  
Sometimes referred to as Configure Terminal, this mode serves as a gateway into the Interface  
and Router.  
Interface  
router  
This mode makes protocol-specific configuration commands accessible.  
Sometimes referred to as configure-router mode, this mode available for the RIP and OSPF  
protocols, makes available router and routing commands.  
Line  
Used for access-class commands. It is available for the OSPF and RIP protocols.  
Route-map  
Mode used to set route metric, route-length and cost data. It is available for the OSPF and RIP  
protocols.  
When you enter the CLI, the following prompt is displayed:  
Access Router CLI, type  
Unit to enter Unit mode  
Kernel to enter kernel mode  
Rip to enter RIP mode  
Ospf to enter OSPF mode  
Quit to exit  
[Unit/Kernel/Rip/Bgp/Ospf]:  
140  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
When you enter Unit the prompt will change to: Unit(enable)  
[Unit/Kernel/Rip/Bgp/Ospf]: unit  
Unit(enable)#  
When you enter Kernel the prompt will change to: KERNEL(enable)  
[Unit/Kernel/Rip/Bgp/Ospf]: Kernel  
Kernel(enable)#  
Enter quit to go back to the top level  
Kernel(enable)#quit  
[Unit/Kernel/Rip/Bgp/Ospf]:  
Enter Rip to enter rip command mode  
[Unit/Kernel/Rip/Bgp/Ospf]: rip  
rip(enable)#  
Enter bgp to enter BGP command mode  
[Unit/Kernel/Rip/Bgp/Ospf]: bgp  
bgp(enable)#  
NOTE: Standard LRU4240 includes RIP1, RIP2, and OSPF dynamic routing. BGP-4 protocol is available as an optional  
dynamic routing protocol.  
UNIT COMMAND REFERENCE  
Unit mode lets you access the device unit E1, and Ethernet port physical interface settings, Frame  
Relay protocol, static routes, firewall, NAT, bridging, multilink, time synchronization, alarms,  
COMM port, and management interfaces.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
configure terminal  
Use the configure terminal command to change to configure terminal mode.  
Command Syntax: configure terminal  
Command Mode: Enable  
Usage  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command. The prompt will change to  
Unit(config)#  
Example  
Unit(enable)#configure terminal  
Unit(config)#  
quit  
Use the quit command to change exit from the current mode and return to the higher level mode.  
Command Syntax: quit  
Example  
Unit(config)#quit  
Unit(enable)#  
show running-config  
Use the show running-config command to show running config.  
Command Syntax  
show running-config  
Command Mode: unit  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.  
Examples  
Unit(enable)#show running-config  
show running-config  
Use the show running-config command to show running config.  
Command Syntax  
show running-config  
Command Mode: rip  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.  
Examples  
Rip(enable)#show running-config  
43: Current configuration:  
44: !  
45: !  
46: !traffic configuration  
47: traffic type ppp  
48: multilink no  
49: traffic monitoring disabled  
50: ip route mode routing  
51: !  
52: !unit configuration  
53: unit protect-mode disabled  
54: unit yellow-alarm disabled  
55: unit clock primary net1  
56: unit clock secondary int  
57: unit remote-comm none  
58: unit ansi-fdl enabled  
59: unit monitor-jack net1  
60: !  
61: !net configuration  
62: t1 framing net1 esf  
63: t1 lbo net1 0db  
....  
show unit id  
Use the show unit id command to show the 6 characters local unit identifier.  
Command Syntax  
show unit id  
Command Mode: unit  
142  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.  
Examples  
Unit(enable)#show unit id  
19: unit id SUNN1  
e1 framing  
Use the e1 framing command to configure the network E1 framing format.  
Command Syntax: e1 framing [net1 | net2 | aux] [unstructured | crc-enabled | crc-disabled]  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
unit(config)#e1 framing net1 unstructured  
unit(config)#  
e1 line-impedance  
Use the e1 line-impedance command to configure the network port line impedance to 75 or 120 ohms. This command is reserved  
for BlackBox personnel only, as it requires changing jumper settings on the hardware unit.  
Command Syntax: e1 line-impedance [net1 | net2 | aux] [120-ohm | 75-ohm]  
[net1 | net2 | aux] select the network port  
120-ohm set line impedance to 120 ohm  
75-ohm set line impedance to 75 ohm  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
unit(config)#e1 line-impedance net1 120-ohm  
e1 timeslot  
Use the e1 timeslot command to allocate an E1 timeslot and assign it to data, voice or idle.  
Command Syntax: e1 timeslot <1-31> [aux | f1 | idle]  
<1-31> select an E1 timeslot number  
aux  
f1  
idle  
Assign selected timeslot to auxiliary dro-and-insert port  
Assign selected timeslot to Ethernet data port  
Selected timeslot will not be used  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
Assign timeslot 10 to transport data from Ethernet data port.  
unit(config)#e1 timeslot 10 f1  
interface IFNAME icmp-redirect  
Use the interface IFNAME icmp-redirect command to enable or disable ICMP redirect messages on the named interface  
Command Syntax: interface [enet | net1 | net2 | bundle0] icmp-redirect [disabled | enabled]  
disabled Do not send ICMP redirect messages on this interface  
enabled Send ICMP redirect messages on this interface  
Usage  
ICMP redirect should be configured on the Ethernet interface only.  
Command Mode: Config  
interface IFNAME ip-addr  
Use the interface IFNAME ip-addr command to set the interface IP address and subnet mask  
Command Syntax: interface [enet | net1 | net2 | bundle0 | comm] ip-addr <A.B.C.D>/<Len>  
enet Ethernet port  
net1 Network port 1  
net2 Network port 2  
comm COMM port  
bundle0 multilink interface, in multilink mode  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
<A.B.C.D> IP address in standard form  
<Len>  
The subnet mask 1 to 32, the part of the IP address shared by all devices on the network.  
Command Mode: Config  
interface enet  
Use the interface enet command to set ethernet port parameters including mask length, half or full duplex mode, and promiscuous  
mode  
Command Syntax:  
interface enet bcast-mask <1-32>  
Set the mask length for Net directed IP broadcast in Fast Forwading mode.  
Usage: Use this command in IP Fast Forwarding mode only.  
interface enet data-mode [full-duplex | half-duplex]  
Set physical data mode to half or full-duplex.  
interface enet fwd-multicast [disabled | enabled]  
Enable or disable forwarding of multicast packets in IP Fast Forwarding mode.  
Usage: This command is applicable in Fast Forwarding mode only.  
interface enet promiscuous [disabled | enabled]  
To enable or disable promiscuous mode in Bridging mode.  
Usage: Use this command in Bridging mode only.  
interface enet proxy-arp [disabled | enabled]  
To enable or disable proxy-arp in Fast-forwarding mode.  
Usage: Use this command in Fast Forwarding mode only.  
interface frame-relay dlci  
Use the interface frame-relay dlci clear command to enter the DLCI number for a virtual cirtuit idendifier and the network port  
on which this DLCI is connected.  
Command Syntax: interface frame-relay dlci <16-1023> [net 1 | net2 | bundle0]  
<16-1023> dlci range  
net1, net2, or bundle 0 Network interface on which the DCLI is connected  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
Unit(config)#interface frame-relay dlci 20 net1  
interface frame-relay lmi  
Use the interface frame-relay lmi command to enable or disable LMI and configure LMI parameters.  
Command Syntax: interface frame-relay lmi [disabled | enabled | enquiry-rx-timer | enquiry-tx-timer | full-status-count | max-lmi-  
errir | type | unit-location]  
disabled  
enabled  
Disable LMI Conditioning  
Enable LMI Conditioning  
enquiry-rx-timer <5-30> Set the expected interval in 5 seconds increments between expected receive enquiry status  
message  
enquiry-tx-timer <5-30> Set the interval in 5 seconds increments between the sending of a STATUS ENQUIRY and the  
receipt of a response.  
full-status-count <5-30> Set the interval in 5 seconds increments between the sending of a STATUS ENQUIRY and the  
receipt of a response.  
max-lmi-error  
<5-30> Set the interval in 5 seconds increments between the sending of a STATUS ENQUIRY and the  
receipt of a response.  
[CPE | CO]  
unit-location  
Command Mode: Config  
144  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Example  
Unit(config)#interface frame-relay dlci 20 net1  
interface frame-relay map  
Use the interface frame-relay map to map IP subnets to DLCIs.  
Command Syntax: interface frame-relay map A.B.C.D/M <16-1023> {net1 | net2 | bundle0]  
A.B.C.D/M  
<16-1023>  
IP network address and subnet mask length  
DLCI number to map to  
net1, net2 or bundle0 Network interface to map to  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
Unit(config)#interface frame-relay map 10.10.10.120/5 200 net1  
interface frame-relay map clear  
Use the interface frame-relay map clear to clear the IP subnets to DLCIs mapping table.  
Command Syntax: interface frame-relay map clear  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
Unit(config)#interface frame-relay map clear  
ip bridge static-route  
Use the ip bridge static-route to configure the static MAC bridge routes table. Each bridge static route identifies a physical WAN  
or LAN port on which to bridge the MAC address.  
Command Syntax:  
ip bridge static-route X:X:X:X:X [enet | net1 | net2 | bundle0  
Use this command in PPP mode:  
X:X:X:X:X Host MAC address to bridge  
IFNAME the port on which to bridge the MAC address  
]
ip bridge static-route X:X:X:X:X [enet | net1 | net2 | bundle0] dlci <16-1023>  
Use this command in Frame Relay mode  
X:X:X:X:X Host MAC address to bridge  
IFNAME the port on which to bridge the host MAC address  
dlci <16-1023> Frame Relay DLCI on which to bridge the host MAC address  
ip bridge static-route clear  
Clear the static MAC brige route table.  
ip dhcp-relay  
Use the ip dhcp-relay to configure the DHCP relay agent.  
Command Syntax:  
ip dhcp-relay [enabled | disabled]: Enables or disables DHCP relay agent  
ip dhcp-relay server A.B.C.D:  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
Set the DCHP server IP address  
ip firewall  
Use the ip firewall to configure the access list filtering packets by denying or permitting access from source hosts to destination  
hosts.  
Command Syntax:  
ip firewall [0-511] [deny | permit] A.B.C.D/M A.B.C.D/M [enet | net1 | net2 | bundle0] [active | inactive]  
Enter up to 512 rules denying or permitting access.  
ip firewall clear: Clear the firewall  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
ip nat  
Use the ip nat to enable or disable NAT for each physical interface.  
Command Syntax:  
ip nat [enabled | disabled]  
Global parameter enabling or disabling NATfeature.  
ip nat IFNAME [nat | napt | two-way-nat] [enabled | disabled]  
To specify and enable the type of nat per interface port.  
Command Mode: Config  
Examples  
Enable nat on NET1 port and disable NAT on Ethernet port and NET2.  
Unit(config)#ip nat net1 enabled  
Unit(config)#ip nat net2 disabled  
Unit(config)#ip nat enet disabled  
Unit(config)#ip nat enabled  
ip nat global  
Use the ip nat global to configure the public IP addresses (Global) used by NAT for the private ip addresses (local-addr).  
Command Syntax:  
ip nat global A.B.C.D/M IFNAME  
A.B.C.D/M: Global registered IP address with subnet mask  
IFNAME the interface port [net1 | net2 | bundle0 | enet0] on which the global IP address is used  
ip nat global clear:  
Clear the NAT global Map table  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
ip nat local-addr  
Use the ip nat local-addr to configure the networks that require NAT translation. Refer to Menu-$C Local address table for more  
information.  
Command Syntax:  
ip nat local-addr A.B.C.D/M IFNAME  
A.B.C.D/M: Local IP Network and subnet to translate  
IFNAME the interface port [net1 | net2 | bundle0 | enet0] to which the the local IP network is attached.  
ip nat local-addr clear: Clear the local address table  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
ip nat static  
Use the ip nat static to configure static NAT one-to-one mapping of global IP address to local IP addresses.Static NAT  
corresponds to menu-$JB NAT Static table.  
Command Syntax:  
ip nat static A.B.C.D A.B.C.D IFNAME  
A.B.C.D Local IP address to translate  
A.B.C.D Translated IP address  
IFNAME the [net1 | net2 | bundle0 | enet0] interface port  
ip nat static clear: Clear Static NAT table  
Command Mode: Config  
ip route  
146  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Use the ip route command to set static routes that map destination IP addresses to next hop IP address or interface. Static routes  
can be edited, changed, viewed from menu$-JC.  
Command Syntax:  
ip route A.B.C.D/M IFNAME metric <0-255>  
Static route mapping destination IP address to interface port  
A.B.C.D/M Static route destination IP address field  
IFNAME the [net1 | net2 | bundle0 | enet0] interface port  
metric <0-255> Static route metric field in seconds  
ip route A.B.C.D/M A.B.C.D metric [0-255]  
Static route mapping destination IP address to next hop IP address  
A.B.C.D/M Static route destination IP address field  
A.B.C.D  
metric <0-255> Static route metric field in seconds  
Command Mode: Config  
Next hop IP address  
ip route bridge-route-aging-time  
Use the ip route bridge-route-aging-time command to set the bridge route aging time. This command is functional in bridging  
packet processing mode only.  
Command Syntax:  
ip bridge-route-aging-time <10-1000000>  
ip route default-gateway  
Use the ip default-gateway to specify the default router or next hop where IP datagrams will be forwarded if no routes are found.  
In Fast Forwarding mode, packets will be forwarded to the default Gateway on the Ethernet port if no host on the LAN responds.  
This command is applicable in bridging, fast forwarding, and routing mode. In routing mode you can also specify a default  
gateway by entering a static route with 0.0.0.0/0 as <nexthop>.  
Command Syntax:  
ip default-gateway [enabled | disabled]  
ip default-gateway A.B.C.D: Set default gateway IP address  
A.B.C.D  
Gateway IP address  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
ip route load-balancing  
Use the ip route load-balancing to load balance traffic between two equal routes on two independent T1/E1 links.  
Command Syntax:  
ip route load-balancing [ enabled | disabled]  
Enable or disable load balancing. You will need to set two routes with equal cost to the same destination network on  
different interface (NET1, NET2).  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
ip route mode  
Use the ip route mode to set packet processing mode to routing, bridging, or Fast Forwarding.  
Command Syntax:  
ip route mode [routing | bridging | fast-forward ]  
routing: In this mode packets will be routed to next hop address based on static and dynamic route tables.  
bridging: Configures the unit for Bridging or VLAN bridging. This mode is commonly called MAC Bridging as the unit  
forwards Ethernet frames.  
fast-forward: In this mode the unit forwards IP packets, not the Ethernet frames, over the WAN link.  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
ip route vlan-id  
Use the ip route vlan-id to set the unit management VLAN ID. With the default VLAN ID disabled, set to 9999, the unit will  
check every VLAN frame for management traffic by matching the destination IP address with the unit IP address, which is the  
Ethernet port IP address. By setting a unit VLAN ID, the unit will first match VLAN ID in VLAN frames, then match the  
destination IP address with the unit IP address. This limits management traffic to a specific VLAN and reduces the processor load.  
Command Syntax:  
ip route vlan-id <0-4093>  
Set the VLAN ID for management traffic.  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
ip route vlan-priority  
Use the ip route vlan-priority to set the unit VLAN priority field so that it can be managed in VLAN bridging mode.  
Management traffic is identified with unit VLAN ID and destination MAC address.  
Command Syntax:  
ip route vlan-priority <0-7>  
Set the VLAN Priority field.  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
ip static-route clear  
Use the ip static-route clear to clear the static routing table.  
Command Syntax:  
ip static-route clear  
Command Mode: Config  
multilink  
Use the multilink command to enable multilink PPP or multilink Frame Relay and configure the multilink protocol parameters.  
Command Syntax:  
multilink [yes | no  
yes ]  
multilink mfr  
Use the multilink mfr command to configure multilink Frame Relay protocol parameters.  
Command Syntax:  
link-ack [1-10]  
link-integrity-timer [1-180]  
retry-counter [1-5]  
multilink mlppp  
Use the multilink mlppp command to configure multilink PPP protocol parameters.  
Command Syntax:  
keep-alive-timeout [1-10]  
keep-alive-timer [1-180]  
retry-counter [1-5]  
t1 framing  
Use the t1 framing command to configure the network T1 framing format.  
Command Syntax: t1 framing [net1 | net2] [esf | d4]  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
unit(config)#t1 framing net1 esf  
148  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
unit(config)#  
t1 lbo  
Use the t1 lbo command to to set the Line Build Out (LBO) value to be used for tuning the circuit attenuation between the unit  
and the last repeater on the T1 circuit.  
Command Syntax: t1 lbo [0dB | -7.5dB | -15 dB]  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
t1 timeslot  
Use the t1 timeslot command to allocate an T1 timeslot and assign it to data, voice or idle.  
Command Syntax: t1 timeslot <1-23> [aux | f1 | idle]  
<1-31> select an E1 timeslot number  
aux  
f1  
idle  
Assign selected timeslot to auxiliary dro-and-insert port  
Assign selected timeslot to Ethernet data port  
Selected timeslot will not be used  
Command Mode: Config  
Example  
Assign timeslot 10 to transport data from Ethernet data port.  
unit(config)#e1 timeslot 10 f1  
time-sync  
Use the time-sync command to configure the RFC-868 time protocol client.  
Command Syntax:  
time-sync [enabled | disabled] Enable of disables time synchronization.  
time-sync attempt-count [1-30]  
time-sync attempt-interval [1-10]  
time-sync frequency days [0-99]  
time-sync frequency hours [0-23]  
time-sync frequency minutes [0-59]  
time-sync frequency seconds [0-59]  
time sync primary-ip A.B.C.D  
time-sync secondary-ip A.B.C.D  
time-sync port [enet | net | comm]  
time-zone  
Use the time-zone command to configure the GMT time zone.  
Command Syntax:  
time-zone ahead-gmt [yes | no]  
time-zone day-light-savings [enabled | disabled]  
time-zone day-light-savings diff-minutes [0-59]  
time-zone day-light-savings start-month [0-12]  
time-zone day-light-savings start-week [0-5]  
time-zone offset-gmt minutes [0-59]  
time-zone day-light-savings diff-hours [0-12]  
time-zone offset-gmt hours [0-12]  
traffic monitoring  
Use the traffic monitoring command to enable or disable RMON1 and RMON2 traffic monitoring.  
Command Syntax:  
traffic monitoring [enabled | disabled]  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
traffic type  
Use the traffic command to set the WAN protocol to Frame Relay or PPP.  
Command Syntax:  
traffic type [frame-relay | ppp]  
unit alarm  
Use the unit alarm command to configure the network alams that will be generated to the NMS.  
Command Syntax:  
unit alarm inband-lonk-loss [enabled | disabled]  
unit alarm interface [net | aux] [carrier-loss | sync-loss | ais-received | yellow-received] [enabled | disabled]  
unit alarm interface enet carrier-loss [enabled | disabled]  
unit ansi-fdl  
Use the unit ansi-fdl command to enable or disable standard remote monitoring ansi-fdl.  
Command Syntax:  
unit ansi-fdl [enabled | disabled]  
unit clock  
Use the unit clock command to configure the primary and secondary clock.  
Command Syntax:  
unit clock primary [net | net1| net2 | aux | internal]  
unit clock secondary [net | net1| net2 | aux | internal]  
unit comm-port  
Use the unit comm-port command to configure the console port and flow control.  
mand Syntax:  
unit comm-port baud [9600 | 14400 | 19200 | 28800 | 38400]  
unit comm-port dcd [enabled | disabled]  
unit comm-port parity [none | odd | even]  
unit comm-port stop-bits [1 | 2]  
unit comm-port word-length [7-8]  
unit comm-port xon-xoff [disabled | xoff-until-xon | xoff-unti-any]  
unit id  
Use the unit id command to set the unit identifier  
Command Syntax:  
unit id [HOSTNAME]  
unit idle-code  
Use the unit idle-code command to set the idle code.  
Command Syntax:  
unit idle-code [0-ff]  
unit management  
Use the unit management command to configure the dial out management feature.  
Command Syntax:  
unit management connection [direct | fdl | modem]  
unit management connection-timeout-logged-on [unlimited | 1-minute | 10-minutes | 30-minutes]  
unit management connection-timeout-not-logged-on [unlimited | 1-minute | 10-minutes | 30-minutes]  
unit management dial-out-time [0-255]  
unit management phone1 WORD  
unit management phone2 WORD  
150  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
unit modem  
Use the unit monitor-jack command to set the monitor jack to net 1 or net2.  
Command Syntax:  
unit modem str1 WORD  
unit modem str2 WORD  
unit outage  
Use the unit outage command is reserved to configure outage source event.  
unit protect-mode  
Use the unit protect-mode command to enable or disable changes from front panel.  
Command Syntax:  
unit protect-mode [enabled | disabled]  
unit radius  
Use the unit radius command to configure RADIUS client.  
Command Syntax:  
unit radius [primary-server | secondary-server] ip A.B.C.D  
unit radius [retries | response-time] [1-3]  
unit radius group-id WORD  
unit radius protocol [yes | no]  
unit remote-comm  
Use the unit remote-comm command to set the remote communication protocol.  
Command Syntax:  
unit remote-comm [none | att | ansi]  
unit sla  
Use the unit sla command to configure Frame Relay SLA parameters.  
Command Syntax:  
unit sla [enabled | disabled]  
unit sla [fdr-ddr-sample-period | delay-period] [1-255]  
unit sla [fdr | ddr] threshold WORD  
unit sla delay-packet-size [50-1500]  
unit snmp  
Use the unit snmp command to configure the SNMP community strings and the three Network Management unit.  
Command Syntax:  
unit snmp community [get } set | trap] LINE  
unit snmp trap [1 | 2 | 3] A.B.C.D  
unit snmp trap port [1 | 2 |3 ] [comm | net1 | net2 | bundle0 | enet]  
unit yellow-alarm  
Use the unit yellow-alarm command to enable or disable yellow alarm  
Command Syntax:  
unit yellow-alarm [enabled | disabled]  
wan-port in-service  
Use the wan-port command to enable or disable service on the NET1 and NET2 WAN ports.  
Command Syntax:  
want-port in-service [port1 | port2] [yes | no]  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
KERNEL COMMAND REFERENCE  
Kernel mode lets you access all the routing tables and interfaces and the various routing protocols  
modes.  
interface IFNAME  
Use the interface IFNAME command to change to configure terminal mode.  
Command Syntax: interface [net1 | net2 | mlppp | e0]  
The argument to this command is one of the router interface e0 for ethernet port, net1 for PPP1, net2 for PPP2, or bundle0 for  
multilink  
Command Mode: Enable  
Usage  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command. The prompt will change to  
Rip(config)#  
Example  
kernel(enable)#show interface net1  
36: Interface net1  
37: index 3 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,POINTOPOINT,RUNNING>  
kernel(enable)#show int net2  
57: Interface net2  
58: index 4 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,POINTOPOINT,RUNNING>  
59: inet 60.10.2.2/24 pointopoint 60.10.2.1 secondary net2  
kernel(enable)#show interface  
39: Interface e0  
40: index 1 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING>  
41: HWaddr: 00:a0:c0:00:37:86  
42: inet 172.18.65.10/24 broadcast 255.255.255.255 secondary e0  
43: Interface mlppp  
44: index 2 metric 1 mtu 1500 <>  
45: Interface net1  
46: index 3 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,POINTOPOINT,RUNNING>  
47: Interface net2  
48: index 4 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,POINTOPOINT,RUNNING>  
49: inet 60.10.2.2/24 pointopoint 60.10.2.1 secondary net2  
quit  
Use the quit command to change exit from the current mode and return to the higher level mode.  
Command Syntax: quit  
Example  
Kernel(config)#quit  
Kernel(enable)#  
debug zebos events  
Use the debug zebos events command to specify the set of debug options for zebosd events.  
Command Syntax: debug zebos events  
no debug zebos events  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.  
Command Mode: Enable  
152  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
debug zebos kernel  
Use the debug zebos kernel command to specify the debug option-set for the zebos routing manager between the kernel interface  
Command Syntax: debug zebos kernel  
no debug zebos kernel  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.  
Command Mode: Enable  
debug zebos packet  
Use the debug zebos packet command to specify the debug option-set for the zebos packet  
Command Syntax:  
debug zebos packet [recv | send | detail]  
no debug zebos packet  
recv Specifies the debug option-set for receive packet.  
send Specifies the debug option-set for send packet.  
detail Sets the debug option set to detailed information.  
Command Mode: Enable  
Examples:  
debug zebra packet  
debug zebra packet recv detail  
show debugging zebos  
Use the show debugging zebos command to display debugging information for the zebos routing manager.  
Command Syntax  
show debugging zebos  
Command Mode: Enable  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.  
Examples  
show debugging zebos  
show interface IFNAME  
Use the show nterface command to display interface configuration and status  
Command Syntax: show interface IFNAME  
IFNAME specifies the name of the interface for which status and configuration is desired:  
net1 for network port 1  
net2 for network port 2  
bundle0 for multilink bundle 0  
e0 for ethernet port  
Command Mode: Enable  
Example  
kernel(enable)#show interface mlppp  
142:Interface mlppp  
143:index 2 metric 1 mtu 1500 <>  
kernel(enable)#show interface net1  
145:Interface net1  
146:index 3 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,POINTOPOINT,RUNNING>  
147:inet 10.1.1.2/24 pointopoint 10.1.1.1 secondary net1  
kernel(enable)#show interface net2  
149:Interface net2  
150:index 4 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,POINTOPOINT,RUNNING>  
151:inet 10.1.3.1/24 pointopoint 10.1.3.2 secondary net2  
kernel(enable)#show interface e0  
156: Interface e0  
157:index 1 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING>  
158:HWaddr: 00:a0:c0:00:4d:3f  
show ip route  
Use the show ip route command to display the IP routing table for a protocol or from a particular table.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Command Syntax: show ip route  
Command Mode: Enable  
connected Connected  
kernel Kernel  
rip  
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)  
static Static routes  
A.B.C.D Network in the IP routing table to display  
A.B.C.D/M IP prefix <network>/<length>, e.g., 35.0.0.0/8  
Examples  
kernel(enable)#show ip route  
106:Codes: K - kernel route, C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, > - selected route, * - FIB route  
108:  
109:C>* 10.1.1.0/24 is directly connected, net1  
110:S 10.1.1.0/24 [1/0] is directly connected, net1  
111:C>* 10.1.3.0/24 is directly connected, net2  
112:S 10.1.3.0/24 [1/0] is directly connected, net2  
113:S 10.20.30.0/24 [3/0] is directly connected, net2  
114:S> 10.20.30.0/24 [2/0] is directly connected, net1  
115:S 70.80.90.0/24 [3/0] is directly connected, net1  
116:S> 70.80.90.0/24 [2/0] is directly connected, net2  
117:C>* 172.30.65.0/24 is directly connected, e0  
118:S 172.30.65.0/24 [1/0] is directly connected, e0  
kernel(enable)#show ip route rip  
90: Codes: K - kernel route, C - connected, S - static, R - RIP,  
91:  
> - selected route, * - FIB route 92:  
93: R> 60.10.1.0/24 [120/2] via 60.10.2.1, net2, 08w5d11h  
94: R> 60.10.1.2/32 [120/2] via 60.10.2.1, net2, 08w5d11h  
95: R> 60.10.4.0/24 [120/2] via 60.10.2.1, net2, 08w5d11h  
96: R> 60.10.4.2/32 [120/2] via 60.10.2.1, net2, 08w5d11h  
97: R> 60.10.5.0/24 [120/2] via 60.10.2.1, net2, 08w5d11h  
98: R> 172.18.0.0/16 [120/2] via 60.10.2.1, net2, 08w5d11h  
show running-config  
Use the show running-config command to show running config.  
Command Syntax  
show running-config  
Command Mode: enable  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.  
Examples  
kernel(enable)#show running-config  
76:  
77: Current configuration:  
78: !  
79: hostname router  
80: password zebos  
81: enable password zebos  
82: !  
83: interface e0  
84: shutdown  
85: !  
86: interface mlppp  
87: shutdown  
88: !  
89: interface net1  
90: shutdown  
91: !  
92: interface net2  
93: !  
94: ip route 33.33.0.0/16 net2 0  
95: ip route 44.44.0.0/16 net2 0  
96: !  
97: line vty  
98: no login  
99: !  
100: end  
154  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
RIP COMMAND REFERENCE  
configure terminal  
Use the configure terminal command to change to configure terminal mode.  
Command Syntax: configure terminal  
Command Mode: Enable  
Usage  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command. The prompt will change to  
Rip(config)#  
Example  
Rip(enable)#configure terminal  
Rip(config)#  
router rip  
Use the router rip command to change to configure router mode.  
Command Syntax  
router rip  
Usage  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command. The prompt will change to  
Rip(router rip)#  
Example  
Rip(config)#router rip  
Rip(rip)#  
interface IFNAME  
Use the interface IFNAME command to change from configure terminal mode to configure interface mode.  
Command Syntax: interface net1 | net2 | mlppp | e0  
Command Mode:: Config  
Usage  
The argument to this command is one of the router interface e0 for ethernet port, net1 for PPP1, net2 for PPP2, or mlppp for  
MLPPP  
Example  
Rip(config)#interface net1  
Rip(net1)#  
quit  
Use the quit command to change exit from the current mode and return to the higher level mode.  
Command Syntax: quit  
Example  
Rip(config)#quit  
Rip(enable)#  
debug rip  
Use the debug rip command to specify the options for the displayed debugging information for RIP events. Use the no parameter  
to disable all debugging.  
Command Syntax  
debug rip (events|zebos|packet)  
events - RIP events debug information is displayed.  
zebos - RIP and ZebOS communication is displayed  
packet - packet (recv|send (detail)) Specifies RIP packets only  
debug rip packet  
recv- specifies that information for received packets be displayed.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
send- specifies that information for sent packets be displayed.  
no debug rip (events | packet | zebos)  
Command Mode:: Enable  
Examples  
RIP(enable)#debug rip events  
7: RECV packet from 60.10.2.1 port 520 on net2  
8: update timer fire!  
9: SEND UPDATE to net2 ifindex 4  
10: unicast announce to 60.10.2.1 on net2  
11: update routes to neighbor 60.10.2.1  
12: SEND to socket 34 port 520 addr 60.10.2.  
distance  
Use the distance command to set the administrative distance.  
Use the no form of the command to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
(no) distance DISTANCE (A.B.C.D/M (ACCESSLIST))  
DISTANCE=<1-255>Specifies the administrative distance value.  
A.B.C.D(/M)Specifies the network prefix and length.  
ACCESSLISTSpecifies the access-list name.  
Command Mode:: Router Configuration  
Examples  
distance 8 10.0.0.0/8 mylist  
no distance 9  
ip rip receive-packet  
Use the ip rip receive packet command to configure the interface to enable the reception of RIP packets. This feature allows the  
user to control the receiving of packets directly on the specified interface. Therefore, the packet receiving is more efficient and  
controllable.  
Command Syntax  
ip rip receive-packet  
no ip rip receive-packet  
Command Mode:: interface  
Examples  
ip rip receive-packet  
ip rip receive version  
Use the ip rip receive version command to receive specified version of RIP packets on an interface basis using version control,  
and override the setting of the version command.  
Use the no form of this command to use the setting established by the version command.  
Command Syntax  
ip rip receive version 1|2|[1 2]  
no ip rip receive version (1|2|[1 2])  
1- specifies acceptance of RIP version 1 packets on the interface.  
2- specifies acceptance of RIP version 2 packets on the interface.  
1 2- specifies acceptance of RIP version 1 and version 2 packets on the interface.  
Command Mode: Router Configuration  
Examples  
ip rip receive version 1 2  
Related Commands  
version  
ip rip send-packet  
156  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Use the ip rip send packet command to configure the interface to enable the sending of RIP packets. This feature allows the user  
to control the sending of packets directly on the specified interface. Therefore, the packet sending is more efficient and  
controllable.  
Command Syntax  
ip rip send-packet  
no ip rip send-packet  
Command Mode: interface  
Examples  
ip rip send-packet  
ip rip send version  
Use the ip rip send version command to send RIP packets on an interface using version control.  
Use the no option on this command to use the global RIP version control rules.  
Command Syntax  
ip rip send version 1|2|[1 2]  
no ip rip send version (1|2)  
1 - specifies sending of RIP version 1 packets out of an interface.  
2 - specifies sending of RIP version 2 packets out of an interface.  
1 2- permits sending of both RIP version 1and 2 packets out of an interface.  
Command Mode: Router Configuration  
Examples  
ip rip send version 1  
ip rip send version 1-compatible  
Use the ip rip send version 1-compatible command to send RIP version 1 compatible packets from a version 2 RIP interface to  
other RIP interfaces. This mechanism causes version 2 RIP to broadcast the packets instead of multicasting them.  
Use the no option on this command to use the global RIP version control rules.  
Command Syntax  
ip rip send version 1-compatible  
Command Mode: Router Configuration  
Examples  
ip rip send version 1-compatible  
Usage Notes  
For testing this case, the configuration must be:!  
interface XXXX  
ip rip send version 1-compatible  
!
router rip  
version 2  
NOTE: The default version for ripd is version 2. Use the versioncommand to explicitly specify a different version.  
ip split-horizon  
Use the ip split-horizon command to perform the split-horizon action on the interface. The default is split-horizon  
poisoned.  
Use the no option on this command to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
ip split-horizon (poisoned)  
poisonedperform split-horizon with poisoned reverse.  
no ip split-horizon  
Command Mode: Router Configuration  
Examples  
ip split-horizon  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
neighbor  
Use the neighbor command to specify a neighbor router. It is used for each connected point-to-point link. Use the no parameter to  
disable the specific router.  
Command Syntax  
(no) neighbor A.B.C.D  
A.B.C.Dis an IP address of a neighboring router with which the routing information will be exchanged.  
Command Mode: configuration mode  
Examples  
neighbor 1.1.1.  
network  
Use the network command to specify a network as one that runs Routing Information Protocol (RIP). Use the no parameter to  
remove the specified network as one that runs RIP.  
Command Syntax  
(no) network [A.B.C.D(/M)]|IFNAME  
A.B.C.D(/M)- specifies the IP address prefix and length of this IP network.  
IFNAME- alphanumeric string specifies the interface name.  
Command Mode: Router Configuration  
Examples  
network 10.0.0.0/8  
network eth0  
passive-interface  
Use the passive-interface command to enable suppression of routing updates on an interface.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this function  
Command Syntax  
(no) passive-interface IFNAME  
IFNAME- specifies the interface name.  
Command Mode: Router Configuration  
Examples  
passive-interface eth0  
route  
Use the route command to configure static RIP routes.  
Use the no form of the command to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
(no) route A.B.C.D/M  
A.B.C.D(/M)- specifies the IP address prefix and length  
Command Mode: Router Configuration  
Examples  
route 1.2.3.4/8  
Usage  
router rip  
...  
version 1  
network 10.10.10.0/24  
network 10.10.11.0/24  
neighbor 10.10.10.10...  
ripd(config-router)# route 10.10.10.0/24...  
version 1  
network 10.10.10.0/24  
network 10.10.11.0/24  
route 10.10.10.0/24  
158  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
router rip  
Use the router rip global command to enable a RIP routing process.  
Use the no form of the command to disable the RIP routing process.  
(no) router rip  
Command Syntax  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.  
Command Mode: Router Configuration  
Examples  
router rip  
Usage Notes  
router rip  
version 1  
network 10.10.10.0/24  
network 10.10.11.0/24  
neighbor 10.10.10.10  
show debugging rip  
Use the show debugging rip command to display the RIP debugging status for these debugging options:  
zebos debugging, RIP event debugging, RIP packet debugging and RIP zebos debugging.  
Command Syntax  
show debugging rip  
Command Mode: Enable  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.  
Examples  
show debugging rip  
show ip protocols  
Use the show ip protocols command to display RIP process parameters and statistics.  
Command Syntax  
show ip protocols  
Command Mode: Enable  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.  
Examples  
show ip protocols  
RIP(enable)#show ip protocols  
116: Routing Protocol is "rip"  
117: Sending updates every 30 seconds with +/-50%, next due in 14 seconds  
118: Timeout after 180 seconds, garbage collect after 120 seconds  
119: Outgoing update filter list for all interface is not set  
120: Incoming update filter list for all interface is not set  
121: Default redistribution metric is 1  
122: Redistributing: connected  
123: Default version control: send version 2, receive version 2  
124:  
125:  
Interface  
net2  
Send Recv Key-chain  
2
2
126: Routing for Networks:  
127:  
128:  
net1  
net2  
129: Routing Information Sources:  
130:  
131:  
Gateway  
60.10.2.1  
BadPackets BadRoutes Distance Last Update  
120 00:15:22  
0
0
132: Distance: (default is 120)  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
show running-config  
Use the show running-config command to show running config.  
Command Syntax  
show running-config  
Command Mode: rip  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.  
Examples  
Rip(enable)#show running-config  
2:  
3: Current configuration:  
4: !  
5: hostname router  
6: password zebos  
7: enable password zebos  
8: !  
9: interface e0  
10: !  
11: interface mlppp  
12: !  
13: interface net1  
14: !  
15: interface net2  
16: !  
17: router rip  
18: redistribute connected  
19: network net1  
20: network net2  
21: !  
22: line vty  
23: no login  
24: !  
25: end  
Rip(enable)#  
show ip rip  
Use the show ip rip command to show RIP routes.  
Command Syntax  
show ip rip  
Command Mode: Enable  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.  
Examples  
show ip rip  
RIP(enable)#show ip rip  
104: Codes: R - RIP, C - connected, O - OSPF, B - BGP  
105:  
106: Network  
Next Hop  
60.10.2.1  
60.10.2.1  
Metric From  
2 60.10.2.1  
2 60.10.2.1  
1
2 60.10.2.1  
2 60.10.2.1  
2 60.10.2.1  
2 60.10.2.1  
1
Time  
42:45  
42:45  
107: R 60.10.1.0/24  
108: R 60.10.1.2/32  
109: C 60.10.2.0/24  
110: R 60.10.4.0/24  
111: R 60.10.4.2/32  
112: R 60.10.5.0/24  
113: R 172.18.0.0/16  
114: C 172.18.65.0/24  
60.10.2.1  
60.10.2.1  
60.10.2.1  
60.10.2.1  
42:45  
42:45  
42:45  
42:45  
timers  
Use the timers command to adjust routing network timers.  
Use the no form of the command to restore the defaults.  
Command Syntax  
timers basic TABLETIMER INFORMATIONTIMER GARBAGETIMER  
no timers basic  
TABLETIMER=<0-4294967295>Specifies the routing table update timer in seconds. The default is 30 seconds.  
INFORMATIONTIMER=<0-4294967295>Specifies the routing information timeout timer in seconds. The default is  
180 seconds. After this interval has elapsed and no updates for a route are received, the route is declared invalid.  
160  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
GARBAGETIMER=<0-4294967295>Specifies the routing garbage collection timer in seconds. The default is 120  
seconds.  
Command Mode: Router Configuration  
Examples  
timers 30 180 120  
version  
Use the version command to set a RIP routing protocol version.  
Use the no form of the command to restore the default.  
Command Syntax  
version <1-2>  
no version <1-2>  
<1-2>- specifies the version of RIP processing. Default is RIP v2.  
Command Mode: Router Configuration  
Examples  
version 1  
Usage  
ripd# sh run...  
router rip  
network 10.10.10.0/24  
network 10.10.11.0/24  
ripd(config-router)# version 1  
router rip...  
version 1  
network 10.10.10.0/24  
network 10.10.11.0/24  
OSPF COMMAND REFERENCE  
area authentication  
Use the area authentication command to enable authentication for an OSPF area. Use the no parameter to remove the  
authentication specification for an area.  
Command Syntax  
area AREAID authentication  
no area AREAID authentication  
AREAID= A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>  
A.B.C.D= The IPv4 specification of the area for which to enable authentication.  
<0-4294967295>= The area identification number of the area for which to enable authentication.  
Default  
Type 0 authentication or no authentication.  
Command Mode: Router mode  
Usage  
Specifying the area authentication sets the authentication to Type 1 authentication or the Simple Password authentication (details  
in RFC 2328). Setting up a Type 1 authentication configures a 64-bit field for that particular network. All packets sent on this  
network must have this configured value in their OSPF header. This allows only routers that have the same passwords to join the  
routing domain. Give all routers that are to communicate with each other through OSPF the same authentication password.  
Use the ip ospf authentication-key command to specify an OSPF authentication password.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# area 1 authentication  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Related Commands  
area default-cost, area stub, ip ospf authentication-key  
area default-cost  
Use the area default-cost command to specify a cost for the default summary route sent into a stub.  
Use the no form of this command to remove the assigned default-route cost.  
Command Syntax  
area AREAID default-cost <0-16777215>  
no area AREAID default-cost  
AREAID=A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>  
A.B.C.D= The IPv4 specification of the address for the stub.  
AREAADDRESSID= The area identification number for the stub.  
default-cost Indicates the cost for the default summary route used for a stub. Default value of cost is 1.  
Command Mode: Router mode  
Usage  
Area command has two configuration options, stub and default-cost. The default-cost option provides the metric for the summary  
default route, generated by the area border router, into the stub area. Use this option only on an area border router that is attached  
to the stub area. Refer to RFC 1587 for information on stub area.  
Examples  
This example sets the default-cost to 10 for area 1.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# area 1 default-cost 10  
Related Commands  
area authentication, area stub  
area export-list  
Use the area export-list command to define restrictions on routes that are advertised from a specified area.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
area AREAID export-list NAME  
no area AREAID export-list  
AREAID=A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>  
A.B.C.D= The IPv4 specification of the address for the stub.  
<0-4294967295>= The area identification number for the stub.  
NAME The name of the configured access list.  
Command Mode: Router mode  
Usage  
Use the export-list in combination with the access list to specify the routes that will be advertised to other areas.This command is  
applied only when generating summary-LSAs (type 3).  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# access-list list1 deny 172.22.0.0/8  
ospfd(config-router)# area 1 export-list list1  
Related Commands  
access list  
area import-list  
Use the area import-list command to import summary routes from a stub.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
area AREAID import-list NAME  
no area AREAID import-list  
162  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
AREAID=A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>  
A.B.C.D= The IPv4 specification of the address for the stub.  
<0-4294967295>= The area identification number for the stub.  
NAME The name of the configured access list.  
Command Mode: Router mode  
Usage  
In conjunction with IP access list, this command is used to configure routes outside the area that will be advertised into this area.  
This command is only applied when generating summary LSAs (type 3).  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# access-list list1 deny 172.22.0.0/8  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)#area 1 import-list list1  
Related Commands  
access list  
area range  
Use the area range command to summarize OSPF routes at an area boundary.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
area AREAID range ADDRESS (advertise|not-advertise|SUBSTITUTE)  
no area AREAID range  
AREAID= A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>  
A.B.C.D= The IPv4 address specification of the address for the stub.  
<0-4294967295>= The area identification number for the stub.  
ADDRESS= A.B.C.D/M The area range prefix and length.  
advertise Advertises this range.  
not-advertise Does not advertise this range.  
SUBSTITUTE = substitute A.B.C.D/M Announce area range as another prefix.  
A.B.C.D/M = Network prefix to be announced instead of range.  
Default  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
The area range command is used to summarize intra-area routes for an area. The single summary route is then advertised to other  
areas by the Area Border Routers (ABRs). Routing information is condensed at area boundaries and outside the area. If the  
network numbers in an area are assigned in a way such that they are contiguous, the ABRs can be configured to advertise a  
summary route that covers all the individual networks within the area that fall into the specified range.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# area 1 range 192.16.0.0/24  
Related Commands  
area shortcut  
Use the area shortcut command to configure the short-cutting mode of an area.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
area AREAID shortcut (default|enable|disable)  
no area AREAID shortcut (enable|disable)  
AREAID= A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>  
A.B.C.D= The IPv4 address specification of the address for the stub.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
<0-4294967295>= The area identification number for the stub.  
default Sets default short-cutting behavior.  
enable Forces short-cutting through the area.  
disable Disables short-cutting through the area.  
Default  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
Examples  
area 1 shortcut default  
area 52 shortcut disable  
no area 42 shortcut enable  
Related Commands  
ospf abr-type shortcut  
area stub  
Use the area stub command to define an area as a stub area.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
(no) area AREAID stub (no-summary)  
AREAID= A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>  
A.B.C.D= The IPv4 address specification of the identifier for the stub.  
<0-4294967295>= The area identification number for the stub.  
no-summary Stops an ABR from sending summary link advertisements into the stub area.  
Default  
No stub area is defined.  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
Configures the area stub command on all routers in the stub area. There are two stub area router configuration commands: the stub  
and default-cost commands. In all routers attached to the stub area, configure the area by using the stub option of the area  
command. For an area border router (ABR) attached to the stub area, use the areadefault-cost command.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# area 1 stub  
Related Commands  
area authentication, area default-cost  
area virtual-link  
Use the area virtual-link command to configure a link between a non-backbone area that cannot be physically connected to the  
backbone area, through another non-backbone area. Use the no form of this command to remove a virtual link.  
Command Syntax  
(no) area AREAID virtual-link A.B.C.D (AUTHENTICATION|AUTHKEY|INTERVAL)  
AREAID=A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>  
A.B.C.D= OSPF area ID in IP address format.  
<0-4294967295>= range of the number of the OSPF area to be linked.  
A.B.C.D = The IP address associated with a virtual link neighbor.  
AUTHENTICATION = authentication (|null|AUTHKEY)  
authentication= Enable authentication on this virtual link  
null = Use null authentication to override password or message digest.  
AUTHKEY = authentication-key KEY  
KEY = An 8 character password  
164  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
INTERVAL=dead-interval|hello-interval|retransmit-interval|transmit-delay VALUE  
VALUE = <1-65535> The number of seconds in the delay or interval.  
hello-interval= The interval the router waits before it sends a hello packet. The default is ten seconds.  
retransmit-interval= The interval the router waits before it retransmits a packet. The default is five  
seconds.  
transmit-delay= The interval the router waits before it transmits a packet.The default value is one  
second.  
dead-interval= The interval during which no packets are received and after which the router considers  
a neighboring router as off-line. The default is 40 seconds.  
Command Mode  
Router mode.  
Usage  
In OSPF, all non-backbone areas must be connected to a backbone area. If the connection to the backbone is lost, the virtual link  
repairs the connection.  
You can configure virtual links between any two backbone routers that have an interface to a common non-backbone area. The  
protocol treats these two routers joined by a virtual link as if they were connected by an unnumbered point-to-point network.To  
configure virtual link, include both the transit area ID and the corresponding virtual link neighbor's router ID in the virtual link  
neighbor. To see the router ID use the show ip ospf command.  
Configure the Hello-interval to be the same for all routers attached to a common network. If the hello-interval is short, the router  
detects topological changes faster, but more routing traffic follows. Retransmit-interval is the expected round-trip delay between  
any two routers in a network. Set the value to be greater than the expected round-trip delay to avoid needless retransmissions.  
Transmit-delay is the time taken to transmit a link state update packet on the interface.Before transmission, the link state  
advertisements in the update packet, are incremented by this amount. Set the transmit-delay to be greater than zero. Also, take into  
account the transmission and propagation delays for the interface.  
Include the transit area ID and the corresponding virtual link neighbor's router ID in each virtual link neighbor to properly  
configure a virtual link.  
Examples (note some examples show abbreviated parameters)  
area 123.123.123.1 virtual-link 123.123.123.2  
area 123.123.123.1 virtual-link 123.123.123.2 authentication  
area 1 virtual-link 123.123.123.2 authentication null  
area 1 virtual-link 1.1.1.1 hel 1 ret 2 tran 3 dead 4  
Related Commands  
area authentication, service password-encryption, show ip ospf  
auto-cost  
Use the auto-cost command to control how OSPF calculates default metrics for the interface.  
Use the no form of this command to assign cost, based only on the interface type.  
Command Syntax  
auto-cost reference-bandwidth <1-4294967>  
no auto-cost reference-bandwidth  
<1-4294967> The reference bandwidth in terms of Mbits per second. The default reference bandwidth is 100 Mbps.  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
By default OSPF calculates the OSPF metric for an interface by dividing the reference bandwidth by the interface bandwidth. The  
default value for the reference bandwidth is 100Mbps. The auto-cost command is used to differentiate high bandwidth links. For  
multiple links with high bandwidth, specify a larger reference bandwidth value to differentiate cost on those links.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# auto-cost reference-bandwidth 50  
Related Commands  
ip ospf cost  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
compatible rfc1583  
Use the compatible rfc1583 command to restore the method used to calculate summary route costs per RFC.  
Use the no form of this command to disable RFC 1583 compatibility.  
Command Syntax  
(no) compatible rfc1583  
Default  
By default, OSPF is rfc 2328 compatible.  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
Prior to RFC 2328, OSPF was compliant with RFC 1583, that specified method for calculating the metric for summary routes  
based on the minimum metric of the component paths available. RFC 2328 specifies a method for calculating metrics based on  
maximum cost. With this change, it is possible that all of the ABRs in an area might not be upgraded to the new code at the same  
time. Compatible rfc1583 command addresses this issue and allows the selective disabling of compatibility with RFC 2328.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# compatible rfc1583  
Related Commands  
debug ospf event  
Use the debug ospf event command to specify debugging options for OSPF event troubleshooting. Use this command without  
parameters to turn on all the options.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
(no) debug ospf event (abr|asbr|lsa|os|router|vl)  
abr shows ABR events  
asbr shows ASBR events  
lsa shows LSA events  
os shows OS interaction events  
router shows other router events  
vl shows virtual link events  
Command Mode  
Privileged EXEC mode and Configure mode  
Usage  
Examples  
ospfd# no debug ospf event abr  
ospfd# debug ospf event asbr  
ospfd# debug ospf event lsa  
ospfd# debug ospf event os  
ospfd# debug ospf event router  
ospfd# debug ospf event vl  
Related Commands  
terminal monitor, log file  
debug ospf ism  
Use the debug ospf ism command to specify debugging options for OSPF Interface State Machine (ISM)  
troubleshooting.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
(no) debug ospf ism (status|events|timers)  
events Displays ISM event information  
status Displays ISM status information  
166  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
timers Displays ISM timer information  
Command Mode  
Privileged EXEC mode and Configure mode  
Usage  
Examples  
ospfd# no debug ospf ism events  
ospfd# debug ospf ism status  
ospfd# debug ospf ism timers  
Related Commands  
terminal monitor, log file  
debug ospf lsa  
Use the debug ospf lsa command to specify debugging options for OSPF Link State Advertisements (LSA)  
troubleshooting.  
Use the no form of this option to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
(no) debug ospf lsa (generate|flooding|install|maxagerefresh)  
generate Displays LSA generation.  
flooding Displays LSA flooding.  
install Show LSA installation.  
maxage Shows maximum age of the LSA in seconds.  
refresh Displays LSA refresh.  
Command Mode  
Privileged EXEC mode and Configure mode  
Usage  
Each LSA has an Age field which is incremented every second. LSAs are discarded when the LS Age reaches 3600 i.e.if  
MaxAge is 3600 seconds (an hour).  
Examples  
ospfd# no debug ospf lsa refresh  
ospfd# debug ospf lsa flooding  
ospfd# debug ospf lsa install  
ospfd# debug ospf lsa maxage  
ospfd# debug ospf lsa generate  
Related Commands  
terminal monitor, log file  
debug ospf nsm  
Use the debug ospf nsm command to specify debugging options for OSPF Neighbor State Machines (NSMs).  
Use the no option to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
(no) debug ospf nsm (status|events|timers)  
status Displays NSM status information.  
events Displays NSM event information.  
timers Displays NSM timer information.  
Default  
Command Mode  
Privileged EXEC mode Configure mode  
Usage  
Examples  
ospfd# debug ospf nsm events  
ospfd# no debug ospf nsm timers  
Related Commands  
terminal monitor, log file  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
debug ospf packet  
Use the debug ospf packet command to specify debugging options for OSPF packets.  
Command Syntax  
(no) debug ospf packet PARAMETERS (send|recv) (detail)  
PARAMETERS = all|dd|hello|ls-request|ls-update|ls-ack  
all Specifies debugging for all OSPF packets.  
dd Specifies debugging for OSPF database descriptions.  
hello Specifies debugging for OSPF hello packets.  
ls-ack Specifies debugging for OSPF link state acknowledgments.  
ls-request Specifies debugging for OSPF link state requests.  
ls-update Specifies debugging for OSPF link state updates.  
send Specifies the debug option set for sent packets.  
recv Specifies the debug option set for received packets.  
detail Sets the debug option set to detailed information.  
Command Mode  
Privileged EXEC mode and Configure mode  
Usage  
Examples  
ospfd# debug ospf packet all detail  
ospfd# debug ospf packet dd send detail  
ospfd# no debug ospf packet ls-request recv detail  
Related Commands  
terminal monitor, log file  
debug ospf route  
Use the debug ospf route command to specify which route calculation to debug. Use this command without  
parameters to turn on all the options.  
Command Syntax  
(no) debug ospf route (ase|ia|install|spf)  
ia specifies the debugging of Inter-Area route calculation  
ase specifies the debugging of external route calculation  
install specifies the debugging of route installation  
spf specifies the debugging of SPF calculation  
Command Mode  
Priviledge Exec mode Configure mode  
Usage  
Examples  
ospfd# debug ospf route  
ospfd# no debug ospf route ia  
ospfd# debug ospf route install  
Related Commands  
debug ospf zebos  
Use the debug ospf zebos command to specify debugging options for OSPF ZebOS information.  
Command Syntax  
(no) debug ospf zebos (interface|redistribute)  
interface Specifies the zebos interface.  
redistribute Specifies zebos redistribute.  
Command Mode  
Privileged EXEC mode and Configure mode  
Usage  
Examples  
ospfd# debug ospf zebos interface  
168  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
ospfd# no debug ospf zebos redistribute  
Related Commands  
terminal monitor, log file  
default-information originate  
Use the default-information originate command to create a default external route into an OSPF routing domain.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this feature.  
Command Syntax  
default-information originate (ALWAYS|METRIC|ROUTE)  
no default-information originate  
ALWAYS = always (METRIC|ROUTE) Used to advertise the default route regardless of whether the  
software has a default route.  
METRIC = [METRIC METRIC-TYPE]|[METRIC-TYPE METRIC]  
METRIC= metric <1-16777214> (ROUTE)  
metric Sets the OSPF metric used in creating the default route. The default metric value is 10. The  
value used is specific to the protocol.  
METRIC-TYPE= metric-type 1|2 (ROUTE)  
metric-type Sets the OSPF external link type for default routes.  
1 Sets OSPF External Type 1 metrics.  
2 Sets OSPF External Type 2 metrics.  
ROUTE= route-map WORD  
WORD= Specifies the name of route-map.  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
The system acts like an Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR) when you use the default-informationoriginate command  
to redistribute routes into an OSPF routing domain. An ASBR does not by default, generate a default route into the OSPF routing  
domain.  
When you use the default-information originate command, also specify the route-map map-name option to avoid a dependency on  
the default network in the routing table.  
The metric-type is an external link type associated with the default route advertised into the OSPF routing domain. The value of  
the external route could be either Type 1 or 2; the default is the Type 2.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# default-information originate always metric 23 metric-type  
2 route-map myinfo  
Related Commands  
default-metric  
Use the default-metric command to set default metric values for the OSPF routing protocol.  
Use the no form of this command to return to the default state.  
Command Syntax  
default-metric <1-16777214>  
no default-metric  
<1-16777214> Default metric value appropriate for the specified routing protocol.  
Default  
Built-in, automatic metric translations, as appropriate for each routing protocol.  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
A default metric facilitates redistributing routes even with incompatible metrics. If the metrics do not convert, the default metric  
provides an alternative and enables the redistribution to continue. Default-metric command is used to cause the current routing  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
protocol to use the same metric value for all redistributed routes. Use this command in conjunction with the redistribute command.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# default-metric 100  
Related commands  
redistribute  
description  
Use the description command to add a description to an interface.  
Use the no form of this command to remove the description.  
Command Syntax  
description LINE  
no description  
LINE 1-1023 characters that are a description of the ZebOS interface.  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# interface eth0  
ospfd(config-if)# description This interface is ethernet interface  
Related Commands  
distance  
Use the distance command to define OSPF route administrative distances based on route type.  
Use the no form of this command to restore the default value.  
Command Syntax  
distance <1-255>|ROUTEPARAMETER  
no distance ospf  
<1-255> = OSPF administrative distance.  
ROUTEPARAMETER= ospf ROUTE1|ROUTE2|ROUTE3 DISTANCE  
ROUTE1= external Sets the distance for routes from other routing domains, learned by redistribution.  
ROUTE2= inter-area Sets the distance for all routes from one area to another area.  
ROUTE3= intra-area Sets the distance for all routes within an area.  
DISTANCE= <1-255> Distance for external, intra-area, or inter-area routes.  
Note: Include ROUTE1, ROUTE2 and ROUTE3 parameters one time each in a single command in any order.  
Default  
The default distance for each type of route (intra, inter or external) is 110.  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
The administrative distance rates the trustworthiness of a routing information source. The distance could be any integer from 0 to  
255. A higher distance value indicates a lower trust rating. For example, an administrative distance of 255 indicates that the  
routing information source cannot be trusted and should be ignored.  
Use this command to set the distance for an entire group of routes, rather than a specific route that passes an access list.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# distance ospf inter-area 20 intra-area 10 external 40  
Related Commands  
distribute-list  
170  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Use the distribute-list command to filter networks in routing updates.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this function  
Command Syntax  
distribute-list LISTNAME out ROUTE  
no distribute-list LISTNAME  
LISTNAME Specifies the name of the access list.  
out Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.  
ROUTE= kernel | connected | static | rip | ospf | bgp  
kernel Specifies kernel routes.  
connected Specifies connected routes.  
static Specifies static routes.  
rip Specifies RIP routes.  
ospf Specifies OSPF routes.  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
Use this command when redistributing other routing protocols into the OSPF routing table.  
Examples  
The following example shows the distribution of BGP routing updates based on the access list list1 (network 172.10.0.0).  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# access-list list1 permit 172.10.0.0 0.0.255.255  
ospfd(config)#router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# distribute-list list1 out bgp  
ospfd(config-router)# redistribute bgp  
Related Commands  
ip ospf authentication  
Use the ip ospf authentication command to send and receive OSPF packets with the specified authentication  
method.  
Use the no form of this command to disable the authentication.  
Command Syntax  
ip ospf authentication (A.B.C.D|MESSAGE|NULL)  
no ip ospf authentication  
A.B.C.D = The IP address of the interface.  
NULL = null (A.B.C.D) Use no authentication; it overrides password  
authentication of the interface.  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
Examples  
ip ospf authentication null  
Related Commands  
ip ospf authentication-key  
ip ospf authentication-key  
Use the ip ospf authentication-key command to specify an OSPF authentication password for the neighboring routers.  
Use the no form of this command to remove an OSPF authentication password.  
Command Syntax  
ip ospf authentication-key AUTHKEY (A.B.C.D)  
no ip ospf authentication-key (A.B.C.D)  
AUTHKEY = Specifies the authentication password. Any continuous string of characters (not more than 8 bytes)  
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface  
Default  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Authentication password not specified.  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
This command creates a password (key) that is inserted into the OSPF header when ZebOS software originates routing protocol  
packets. Assign a separate password to each network for different interfaces. All neighboring routers on the same network with the  
same password exchange OSPF routing data.  
The key can be used only when authentication is enabled for an area. Use the area authentication command to enable  
authentication.  
Simple password authentication allows a password to be configured for each area. Configure the routers in the same routing  
domain with the same password.  
Examples  
ip ospf authentication-key 123  
Equivalent Commands  
ospf authentication-key, area authentication  
ip ospf cost  
Use the ip ospf cost command to explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an interface.  
Use the no form of this command to reset the path cost to the default value.  
Command Syntax  
ip ospf cost COST (A.B.C.D)  
no ip ospf cost (A.B.C.D)  
COST = <1-65535> Specifies the link-state metric.The default value is 10.  
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
The interface cost indicates the overhead required to send packets across a certain interface. It is inversely proportional to the  
bandwidth of that interface. By default, the cost of an interface is calculated based on the bandwidth (108/ bandwidth);  
use this ip ospf cost command to set the cost manually.  
Examples  
The following example shows setting ospf cost as 10 on interface fxp0 for IP address 10.10.10.50  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0  
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf cost 10 10.10.10.50ip ospf cost 123  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf interface  
Equivalent Commands  
ospf cost  
ip ospf database-filter  
This command turns on the LSA database-filter for a particular interface. Use the no parameter to turn off the filter.  
Command Syntax  
ip ospf database-filter ALL OUT (A.B.C.D)  
no ip ospf database-filter (A.B.C.D)  
ALL = Filter all LSAs  
OUT = Outgoing LSAs  
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface.  
Default  
Disabled, all outgoing LSAs are flooded to the interface.  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
172  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
OSPF floods new LSAs over all interfaces in an area, except the interface on which the LSA arrives. This redundancy  
ensures robust flooding. However, too much redundancy can waste bandwidth and might lead to excessive link and CPU  
usage in certain topologies, resulting in destabilizing the network. To avoid this, use the database-filter command to block  
flooding of LSAs over specified interfaces.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# interface eth0  
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf database-filter all out  
Related Commands  
ip ospf dead-interval  
Use the ip ospf dead-interval command to set the interval during which no hello packets are received and after  
which a neighbor is declared dead.  
Use the no form of this command to return to the default time.  
Command Syntax  
ip ospf dead-interval INTERVAL (A.B.C.D)  
no ip ospf dead-interval (A.B.C.D)  
INTERVAL= <1-65535> Specifies the interval in seconds. The default interval is 40 seconds.  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
The dead-interval is the amount of time that the router waits to receive an OSPF hello packet from the neighbor before declaring  
the neighbor down. This value is advertised in the router's hello packets. It must be a multiple of hello-interval and be the same  
for all routers on a specific network.  
Examples  
The following example shows configuring dead-interval for 10 seconds on fxp0 interface for IP address 10.10.10.50.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0  
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf dead-interval 10 10.10.10.50  
Related Commands  
ip ospf hello-interval, show ip ospf interface  
Equivalent Commands  
ospf dead-interval  
ip ospf hello-interval  
Use the ip ospf hello-interval command to specify the interval between hello packets.  
Use the no form of this command to return to the default time.  
Command Syntax  
ip ospf hello-interval INTERVAL (A.B.C.D)  
no ip ospf hello-interval (A.B.C.D)  
INTERVAL= <1-65535> Specifies the interval in seconds. The default interval is 10 seconds.  
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface.  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
The hello-interval is advertised in the hello packets. Configure the same hello-interval for all routers on a specific network.  
A shorter hello interval ensures faster detection of topological changes but results in more routing traffic.  
Examples  
The following example shows setting the hello-interval for 3 seconds on interface fxp0 for IP address 10.10.10.50.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0  
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf hello-interval 3 10.10.10.50  
Related Commands  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
ip ospf dead-interval, show ip ospf interface  
Equivalent Commands  
ospf hello-interval  
ip ospf network  
Use the ip ospf network command to configure the OSPF network type to a type different from the default for the media.  
Use the no form of this command to return to the default value.  
Command Syntax  
ip ospf network broadcast|non-broadcast|point-to-point|point-to-multipoint  
no ip ospf network  
broadcast Sets the network type to broadcast.  
non-broadcast Sets the network type to NBMA.  
point-to-multipoint Sets the network type to point-to-multipoint.  
point-to-point Sets the network type to point-to-point.  
Default  
Broadcast type.  
Command Mode  
interface mode  
Usage  
Use the ip ospf network command to configure Broadcast Networks as Nonbroadcast Multiaccess Networks (NBMA) and vice  
versa. You would need to do this if you have routers in your network that do not support multicast addressing.  
This command saves you from having to configure neighbors. Configuring NBMA networks requires a fully meshed network or a  
virtual circuit connecting every router. In case the network is not fully meshed, configure the OSPF network type as a point-to-  
multipoint network. Routing between two routers that are not directly connected will go through a third router that has virtual  
circuits to both routers.  
Examples  
The following example shows setting the network to point-to-point type on the fxp0 interface.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0  
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf network point-to-point  
Equivalent Commands  
ospf network  
ip ospf priority  
Use the ip ospf priority command to set the router priority to determine the designated router for the network.  
Use the no form of this command to return to the default value.  
Command Syntax  
ip ospf priority <1-255> (A.B.C.D)  
no ip ospf priority (A.B.C.D)  
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface.  
Default  
The default priority is 1.  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
Set the priority to help determine the OSPF Designated Router (DR) for a network. If two routers attempt to become the DR, the  
router with the higher router priority becomes the DR. If the router priority is the same for two routers, the router with the higher  
router ID takes precedence.  
Only routers with nonzero router priority values are eligible to become the designated or backup designated router.  
Configure router priority for multiaccess networks only and not for point-to-point networks.  
Examples  
The following example shows setting the OSPF priority value to 3 on the fxp0 interface for the IP address 10.10.10.50.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
174  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0  
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf priority 3 10.10.10.50  
Related Commands  
ip ospf network, neighbor  
Equivalent Commands  
ospf priority  
ip ospf retransmit-interval  
Use the ip ospf retransmit-internal command to specify the time between link-state advertisement (LSA) retransmissions for  
adjacencies belonging to the interface.  
Use the no form of this command to return to the default value.  
Command Syntax  
ip ospf retransmit-interval INTERVAL (A.B.C.D)  
no ip ospf retransmit-interval (A.B.C.D)  
INTERVAL= <3-65535> Specifies the time in seconds between retransmissions. Default interval value is 5  
seconds.  
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface.  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
After sending an LSA to a neighbor, the router keeps the LSA until it receives an acknowledgement. In case the router does not  
receive an acknowledgement during the set time (the retransmit interval value) it retransmits the LSA.  
Set the retransmission interval value conservatively to avoid needless retransmission. The interval should be greater than the  
expected round-trip delay between two routers.  
Examples  
The following example shows setting the ospf retransmit interval to 6 seconds on the fxp0 interface for IP address 10.10.10.50.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0  
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf ospf retransmit-interval 6 10.10.10.50  
Related Commands  
ip ospf transmit-delay  
Use the ip ospf transmit-delay command to set the estimated time it takes to transmit a link-state-update packet on the interface.  
Use the no form of this command to return to the default value.  
Command Syntax  
ip ospf transmit-delay DELAY (A.B.C.D)  
no ip ospf transmit-delay (A.B.C.D)  
DELAY= <1-65535> Specifies the time taken, in seconds, to transmit a link-state-update. The default  
transmit delay value is 1 second.  
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface.  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
The transmit delay value adds a specified time to the age field of an update. If the delay is not added, the time in which the LSA  
transmits over the link is not considered. This command is especially useful for low speed links. Add transmission and propagation  
delays when setting the transmit delay value.  
Examples  
The following example shows setting the OSPF transmit delay time to 3 seconds on the fxp0 interface for IP address 10.10.10.50.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0  
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf transmit-delay 3 10.10.10.50  
Equivalent Commands  
ospf transmit-delay  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
login  
Use this command to set a password prompt, before entering the configuration mode and to enable password checking.  
Command Syntax  
(no) login  
Default  
Enabled.  
Command Mode  
Line mode  
Usage  
Login is enabled by default. The no login command allows users to connect directly to the Priviledged Exec mode skipping the  
password verification prompt. After using the no login command if the user changes to login command again, the system uses the  
password being used earlier, unless the user specifies a password in the configure mode (see the following example).  
Example  
The following examples show the use of login and no login command. In this example, a password pass is set (in configure mode)  
before using the login command.  
!
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# line vty  
ospfd(config-line)# no login  
!
!
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd#(config)# password pass  
ospfd#(config)# line vty  
ospfd#(config-line)# login  
!
Related Commands  
match interface  
Use the match interface command to define the interface match criterion.  
Use the no form of this command to remove the specified match criterion.  
Command Syntax  
match interface IFNAME  
no match interface  
IFNAME A string that specifies the interface for matching.  
Default  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Route-map mode  
Usage  
To set the conditions for redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another, use the match and set route-map configuration  
commands. The match commands specify the match criteria under which redistribution is allowed for the current route-map. The  
set commands specify the set redistribution actions to be performed, if the match criteria are met.  
If a route does not match the criteria completely, it will not be advertised for outbound route-maps and neither be accepted for  
inbound route-maps. You can modify the data by configuring a second route-map section with an explicit match specified.  
Use the match interface command to match the first hop interface of a route.  
Example  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# route-map mymap1 permit 10  
ospfd(config-route-map)# match interface eth0  
Related Commands  
match tag, match route-type external  
176  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
match metric  
Use the match metric command to match the specified metric value. Use the no parameter to turn off the matching.  
Command Syntax  
(no) match metric METRICVALUE  
METRICVALUE = <0-16777216>  
Default  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Route-map mode  
Usage  
To set the conditions for redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another, use the match and set route-mapconfiguration  
commands. The match commands specify the match criteria under which redistribution is allowed for the current route-map. The  
set commands specify the set redistribution actions to be performed, if the match criteria are met.  
If a route does not match the criteria completely, it will not be advertised for outbound route maps and neither be accepted for  
inbound route maps. You can modify the data by configuring a second route-map section and specifying an explicit match.  
Some types of LSAs have specific metric values.Use the match metric command to match metric value.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# route-map mymap1 permit 10  
ospfd(config-route-map)# match metric 100  
Related Commands  
match tag, match route-type external  
match route-type external  
Use the match route-type external command to match specified external route type. Use the no parameter to turn off the matching.  
Command Syntax  
(no) match route-type external (type-1 | type-2)  
Default  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Route-map mode  
Usage  
To set the conditions for redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another, use the match and set route-mapconfiguration  
commands. The match commands specify the match criteria under which redistribution is allowed for the current route-map. The  
set commands specify the set redistribution actions to be performed, if the match criteria are met.  
If a route does not match the criteria completely, it will not be advertised for outbound route maps and neither be accepted for  
inbound route maps. You can modify the data by configuring a second route map section and specifying an explicit match.  
Use the match route-type external command to match specific external route types. AS-external LSA is either Type-1 or Type-2.  
External type-1 matches only Type 1 external routes and external type-2 matches only Type 2 external routes.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# route-map mymap1 permit 10  
ospfd(config-route-map)# match route-type external type-1  
Related Commands  
match tag, match route-type external  
match tag  
Use the match tag command to match the specified tag value. Use the no parameter to turn off the declaration. Tag is  
the route tag which is labeled by another routing protocol (BGP or other IGP when redistributing).  
Command Syntax  
(no) match tag <0-4294967295>  
Default  
Disabled  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Command Mode  
Route-map mode  
Usage  
To set the conditions for redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another, use the match and set route-mapconfiguration  
commands. The match commands specify the match criteria under which redistribution is allowed for the current route-map. The  
set commands specify the set redistribution actions to be performed, if the match criteria are met.  
If a route does not match the criteria completely, it will not be advertised for outbound route maps and neither be accepted for  
inbound route maps. You can modify the data by configuring a second route map section with an explicit match specified.  
Use the match tag command to match the specified tag value.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# route-map mymap1 permit 10  
ospfd(config-route-map)# match tag 100  
Related Commands  
match metric, match route-type external  
neighbor  
Use the neighbor command to configure OSPF routers interconnecting to non-broadcast networks.  
Use the no form of this command to remove a configuration.  
Command Syntax  
(no) neighbor NEIGHBORADDRESS PRIORITY|POLL  
NEIGHBORADDRESS=A.B.C.D Specifies the interface IP address of the neighbor.  
PRIORITY= priority <0-255> (POLL) Specifies the 8-bit number indicating the router priority value of the  
non-broadcast neighbor associated with the IP address specified. The default is 0. This keyword does not  
apply to point-to-multipoint interfaces.  
POLL= poll-interval <1-65535> Dead neighbor polling interval in seconds. It is recommended to  
set this value much higher than the hello interval. The default is 120 seconds.  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
Configure a router as a broadcast network at the OSPF level. To do this, use the neighbor command and include one neighbor  
entry for each known nonbroadcast network neighbor. Configure the neighbor address on the primary address of the interface.  
Poll interval is the reduced rate at which routers continue to send hello packets, when a neighboring router has become inactive.  
Set the poll interval to be much larger than hello interval (RFC 1247).  
Examples  
This example shows neighbor configured with a priority value and poll interval time.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# neighbor 1.2.3.4 priority 1 poll-interval 90  
Related Commands  
network area  
Use the network area command to define the interfaces on which OSPF runs and to define the area ID for those interfaces.  
Use the no form of this command to disable OSPF routing for interfaces defined with the address wildcard-mask pair.  
Command Syntax  
network AREAADDRESS/M area AREAID  
no network  
AREAADDRESS=A.B.C.D Specifies the network prefix covered by AREAID.  
M Specifies the IP-address-type mask that includes "don't care" bits.  
AREAID= A.B.C.D.|<0-4294967295> Specifies the area that is to be associated with the OSPF address  
range. The area ID can be either a decimal value or an IP address.  
Default  
Disabled.  
178  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
The address and mask define interfaces to be associated with a specific OSPF area. The primary address of the interface should be  
covered by the network area command. Covering only the secondary address does not enable OSPF over that interface.  
The mask is used as a shortcut and it helps putting a list of interfaces in the same area. The mask contains wild card bits where 0  
is a match and 1 is a don't care bit. For example, 0.0.0.255 is a match in the first three bytes of the network number.  
Any individual interface can only be attached to a single area. If the address ranges specified for the different areas overlap, the  
software will adopt the first area in the network command list and ignore the subsequent overlapping portions.  
Specify address ranges that do not overlap.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# network 10.0.0.0/8 area 3  
ospfd(config-router)# network 10.0.0.0/8 area 1.1.1.1  
Related commands  
opaque  
Use the opaque command to redistribute the specified scope of opaque-LSAs.  
Command Syntax  
opaque (link|area|as) WORD TYPE ID DATA  
link flood opaque-LSA to link-local scope. i.e. the LSA is not flooded over any routers.  
area flood opaque-LSA to single area. i.e. the routers in the same area should have the LSAs.  
as flood opaque-LSA to whole AS. i.e. the routers in the single AS should have those LSAs.  
WORD = if scope is link, WORD is an interface address.  
if scope is area, WORD is an Area-ID.  
if scope is as, WORD should be ignored.  
TYPE = <0-256> Opaque type which is maintained by IANA.  
ID = <0-16777216> Opaque ID which is the value specific to the Opaque type.  
DATA = Actual Opaque Information which is stored into packet body of Opaque LSAs.  
Default  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# opaque link mylink 128 65535 mylink  
Related Commands  
opaque-lsa-capable  
Use the opaque-lsa-capable command to enable opaque-lsa; use the no parameter to disable it.  
Command Syntax  
(no) opaque-lsa-capable  
Default  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
Opaque-LSAs are Type 9, 10 and 11 LSAs that deliver information used by external applications.  
When using this command, restart the OSPF router.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# opaque-lsa-capable  
Related commands  
ospf abr-type  
Use the ospf abr-type command to set an OSPF area border router (ABR) type.  
Use the no parameter to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
ospf abr-type cisco|ibm|shortcut|standard  
(no) ospf abr-type cisco|ibm|shortcut  
cisco Specifies an alternative ABR using Cisco implementation.  
ibm Specifies an alternative ABR using IBM implementation.  
shortcut Specifies a shortcut ABR.  
standard Specifies a standard behavior ABR that conforms to RFC 2328 (Default).  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
Specify the ABR type for better functioning between different implementations. This command is specially useful in a multivendor  
environment.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# ospf abr-type standard  
Related Commands  
ospf authentication-key  
Use the ospf authentication-key command to assign a password to be used by neighboring routers.  
Use the no parameter to remove a previously assigned password.  
Command Syntax  
ospf authentication-key AUTHKEY  
no ospf authentication-key  
AUTHKEY Specifies the authentication password. Any continuous string of characters (not more than 8 bytes)  
Default  
Authentication password not specified.  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
The authentication-key command creates a key (password) which is inserted into the OSPF header, when ZebOS software  
originates routing protocols packets. You can assign a separate password to each network for different interfaces.  
All neighboring routers on the same network must have the same password to enable exchange of OSPF information. The  
password can be used only if authentication has been enabled for an area. Use the area authentication command to enable  
authentication.  
Simple password authentication allows a password to be configured per area. Configure the routers in the same routing domain  
with the same password.  
Examples  
ospf authentication-key mykeykey  
ospf authentication-key  
Related Commands  
ip ospf authentication-key, area authentication  
ospf cost  
Use the ospf cost command to explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an interface.  
Use the no form of this command to reset the cost of the path to default.  
180  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Command Syntax  
ospf cost COST  
no ospf cost  
COST = <1-65535> Specifies the link-state metric.The default value is 10.  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
The interface cost indicates the overhead required to send packets across a certain interface. It is inversely proportional to  
the bandwidth of that interface. By default, the cost of an interface is calculated based on the bandwidth (108/ bandwidth);  
use this command to set cost manually.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0  
ospfd(config-if)# ospf cost 10  
Equivalent Commands  
ip ospf cost  
ospf dead-interval  
Use the ospf dead-interval command to set the interval during which no hello packets are received and after which a neighbor is  
declared dead.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this function  
Command Syntax  
ospf dead-interval INTERVAL  
no ospf dead-interval  
INTERVAL= <1-65535> Specifies the interval in seconds. The default interval is 40 seconds  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
The dead-interval is the amount of time that the router waits to receive an OSPF hello packet from the neighbor before declaring  
the neighbor down. This value is advertised in the router's hello packets. It must be a multiple of hello-interval and be the same  
for all routers on a specific network.  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0  
ospfd(config-if)# ospf dead-interval 10 10.10.10.50  
Equivalent Commands  
ip ospf dead-interval  
ospf hello-interval  
Use the ospf hello-interval command to specify the interval between hello packets that the ZebOS software  
sends on the interface.  
Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.  
Command Syntax  
ospf hello-interval INTERVAL  
no ospf hello-interval  
INTERVAL= <1-65535> Specifies the interval in seconds. The default interval is 10 seconds.  
Default  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
Hello-interval is advertised in the hello packets. Configure the same hello-interval for all routers on a specific network. A shorter  
hello interval ensures faster detection of topological changes but this also results in more routing traffic.  
Examples  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0  
ospfd(config-if)# ospf hello-interval 3 10.10.10.50  
Equivalent Commands  
ip ospf hello-interval  
ospf network  
Use the ospf network command to configure the OSPF network type to a type other than the default for a given medium.  
Use the no form of this command to return to the default value.  
Command Syntax  
ospf network broadcast|non-broadcast|point-to-multipoint|point-to-point  
no ospf network  
broadcast Specifies OSPF braodcast as a multi-access network.  
non-broadcast Sets the network type to NBMA.  
point-to-multipoint Sets the network type to point-to-multipoint.  
point-to-point Sets the network type to point-to-point.  
Default  
The default is the broadcast type.  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
Use ospf network command to configure broadcast networks as nonbroadcast multiaccess networks (NBMA) and vice versa. You  
would need to do this if you have routers in your network that do not support multicast addressing.  
The ospf network command saves you from having to configure neighbors. Configuring NBMA networks requires a fully meshed  
network or a virtual circuit connecting every router. In case the network is not fully meshed, configure the OSPF network type as  
a point-to -multipoint network. Routing between two routers that are not directly connected will go through the router that has  
virtual circuits to both routers.  
Examples  
The following example shows setting the network to point-to-point type on the fxp0 interface.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0  
ospfd(config-if)# ospf network point-to-point  
Equivalent Commands  
ip ospf network  
ospf priority  
Use the ospf priority command to set the router priority, which helps determine the designated router for this network.  
Use the no form of this command to return to the default value.  
Command Syntax  
ospf priority <1-255>  
no ospf priority  
Default  
The default priority is 1.  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
Set the priority to help determine the OSPF Designated Router (DR) for a network. If two routers attempt to become the DR, the  
router with the higher router priority becomes the DR. If the router priority is the same for two routers, the router with the higher  
router ID becomes DR.  
Only a router with a nonzero router priority value is eligible to become the designated or backup designated router.  
Configure router priority for multiaccess networks only, and not for point-to-point networks.  
Examples  
The following example shows setting the OSPF priority value to 3 on the fxp0 interface for IP address 10.10.10.50.  
182  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0  
ospfd(config-if)# ospf priority 3 10.10.10.50  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf  
Equivalent Commands  
ip ospf priority  
ospf router-id  
Use the ospf router-id command to specify a router ID for the OSPF process.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
ospf router-id IPADDRESS  
no ospf router-id  
IPADDRESS Specifies the router ID in IPv4 address format.  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
Configure each router with a unique router-id. In an OSPF router process which has active neighbors, a new router-id is  
used at the next reload or when you start the OSPF manually.  
Examples  
The following example shows a specified router ID 2.3.4.5.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# ospf router-id 2.3.4.5  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf neighbor  
ospf transmit-delay  
Use the ospf transmit-delay command to set the estimated time it takes to transmit a link-state-update packet.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this function  
Command Syntax  
ospf transmit-delay DELAY  
no ospf transmit-delay  
DELAY= <1-65535> the delay in seconds. The default transmit delay value is 1 second  
Command Mode  
Interface mode  
Usage  
The transmit delay value adds a specified time to the age field of an update. If the delay is not added, the time in which the LSA  
transmits over the link is not considered. This command is especially useful for low speed links. Add transmission and propagation  
delays when setting the transmit delay value.  
Examples  
The following example shows setting the OSPF transmit-delay time to 3 seconds on the fxp0 interface for the IP address  
10.10.10.50.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0  
ospfd(config-if)# ospf transmit-delay 3 10.10.10.50  
Equivalent Commands  
ip ospf transmit-delay  
passive-interface  
Use this command to suppress the routing updates on the specified interface.  
Command Syntax  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
passive-interface INTERFACENAME (A.B.C.D)  
INTERFACENAME = The name of the interface.  
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface.  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
The passive-interface command is used to configure OSPF on simplex Ethernet interfaces. Since the simplex interfaces represent  
only one network segment between two devices, configure the transmitting interface as a passive interface. This ensures that OSPF  
does not send hello packets for the transmitting interface. Both the devices can see each other via the hello packet generated for  
the receiving interface.  
Examples  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# passive-interface fxp0  
Related Commands  
redistribute  
Use the redistribute command to redistribute routes from other routing protocols, static routes and kernel routes into an ospf  
routing table.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
redistribute PROTOCOL (METRICS|ROUTE)  
no redistribute PROTOCOL  
PROTOCOL= bgp|rip| ospf| connected|static|kernel  
bgp Specifies BGP.  
connected Specifies connected routes.  
ospf6 Specifies OSPF v3. ( Visible only if OSPFv3 is enabled on the system)  
rip Specifies RIP.  
ripng Specifies RIPng. (Visible only if ripng is enabled on the system)  
static Specifies static routes.  
kernel Specifies kernel routes.  
METRICS= [METRIC METRIC-TYPE]|[METRIC-TYPE METRIC]  
METRIC= metric <1-16777214> (ROUTE)  
METRIC-TYPE= metric-type <1-2> (ROUTE)  
ROUTE= route-map WORD  
WORD= pointer to route-map entries list. A route-map is a series of rule-sets defined in privileged Exec  
mode.  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
Examples  
The following example shows redistribution of bgp routes into ospf routing table, with metric as 12.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# redistribute bgp metric 12  
Related Commands  
refresh timer  
Use the refresh timer command to adjust refresh parameters.  
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.  
Command Syntax  
(no) refresh timer TIMERVALUE  
TIMERVALUE = <10-1800> Timer value in seconds. The default refresh time is 10 seconds.  
Command Mode  
184  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Router mode  
Usage  
Examples  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# refresh timer 12  
Related Commands  
router-id  
Use the router-id command to set a fixed router-id.  
Use the no form of this command to force OSPF to use the previous OSPF router-id behavior.  
Command Syntax  
router-id IPADDRESS  
no router-id  
IPADDRESS Specifies the router ID in IPv4 address format.  
Default  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
Examples  
The following example shows a fixed router ID 10.10.10.60  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# router-id 10.10.10.60  
Related Commands  
router ospf  
Use the router ospf command to enter router mode and to configure an OSPF routing process. Specify the process ID with this  
command to configure multiple instances.  
Use the no form of this command to terminate an OSPF routing process. Use the no form of this command with the process ID  
parameter, to terminate and delete a specific OSPF routing process.  
Command Syntax  
(no) router ospf  
(no) router ospf PROCESSID  
PROCESSID = <1-65535> Any positive integer identifying a routing process. The process ID should be  
unique for each routing process.  
Default  
No routing process defined.  
Command Mode  
Configure mode  
Usage  
For releases starting with 1.1, router ospf command forces the router into compatibility mode. This mode supports only one OSPF  
instance and prevents the creation of other instances of OSPF. For multiple instances-- first, use the norouter ospf command to end  
the single instance routing process, and then, configure multiple instances by specifying the process ID parameter for each  
instance.  
Examples  
This example shows the use of router ospf command to enter router mode. Note the change in the prompt.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf  
ospfd(config-router)#  
Related Commands  
set metric-type  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Use the set metric-type command to set the metric type for the destination routing protocol.  
Use the no form of this command to return to the default.  
Command Syntax  
(no) set metric-type 1|2  
1 = Select to set external type 1 metric.  
2 = Select to set external type 2 metric.  
Default  
Command Mode  
Route-map mode  
Usage  
Examples  
In this example the metric type of the destination protocol is set to OSPF external Type 1.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# route-map rmap1 permit 3  
ospfd(config-route-map)# set metric-type 1  
Related Commands  
set next-hop  
Use the set next-hop command to specify the next-hop address. Use the no parameter of this command to reset the  
default next-hop value.  
Command Syntax  
(no) set next-hop A.B.C.D  
A.B.C.D = IP address of the next hop router.  
Default  
Command Mode  
Route-map mode  
Usage  
Every routing table entry has a next-hop value. Once the next-hop value is calculated, the router gives the value to the forwarding  
engine.  
To set the next-hop, you must first have a match clause. Match and set commands set the conditions for redistributing routes from  
one routing protocol to another. The match command specifies the match criteria under which redistribution is allowed for the  
current route-map. The set command specifies the set redistribution actions to be performed, if the match criteria are met.  
Examples  
In the following example, routes that pass the access list have the next hop set to 10.10.12.50:  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# route-map rmap1 permit 3  
ospfd(config-route-map)# set next-hop 10.10.12.50  
Related Commands  
set tag  
Use the set tag command to set specified tag value. Use the no form of this command to return to the default.  
Command Syntax  
(no) set tag TAGVALUE  
TAGVALUE = <0-4294967295> Tag value for destination routing protocol.  
Default  
Command Mode  
Route-map mode  
Usage  
Tag in this command is the route tag which is labeled by another routing protocol (BGP or other IGP when redistributing), because  
AS-external-LSA has route-tag field in its LSAs. And also with using route-map, ospfd can tag the LSAs with appropriate tag  
value. Sometimes tag matches with using route-map, and sometimes the value may be used by another application.  
Examples  
In the following example the tag value of the destination routing protocol is set to 6:  
186  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# route-map rmap1 permit 3  
ospfd(config-route-map)# set tag 6  
Related Commands  
show debugging ospf  
Use the show debugging ospf command to display the set OSPF debugging option.  
Command Syntax  
show debugging ospf  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
This is a sample output from the show debugging ospf command. Some lines in this output wrap around, they might not wrap  
around in the actual display.  
ospfd# show debugging ospf  
OSPF debugging status:  
OSPF packet Link State Update debugging is on  
OSPF all events debugging is on  
ospfd# te mo  
ospfd# 2002/05/09 14:08:11 OSPF: RECV[LS-Upd]: From 10.10.10.70 via eth0:10.10.10.50(10.10.10.10 -> 224.0.0.5)  
2002/05/09 14:08:11 OSPF: LSA[10.10.10.10:10.10.10.70]: instance(0x8139cd0) created withLink State Update  
2002/05/09 14:08:11 OSPF: RECV[LS-Upd]: From 10.10.10.70 via eth0:10.10.10.50 (10.10.10.10-> 224.0.0.5)  
2002/05/09 14:08:11 OSPF: LSA[10.10.10.70:10.10.10.70]: instance(0x813c688) created withLink State Update  
2002/05/09 14:08:52 OSPF: RECV[LS-Upd]: From 10.10.10.70 via eth0:10.10.10.50 (10.10.10.10-> 224.0.0.5)  
2002/05/09 14:08:52 OSPF: LSA[20.2.2.0:10.10.10.70]: instance(0x813a8e8) created with LinkState Update  
2002/05/09 14:08:52 OSPF: LSA[40.2.2.0:10.10.10.70]: instance(0x8138be0) created with LinkState Update  
2002/05/09 14:11:12 OSPF: RECV[LS-Upd]: From 10.10.10.70 via eth0:10.10.10.50 (10.10.10.10-> 224.0.0.5)  
2002/05/09 14:11:12 OSPF: LSA[10.10.11.0:10.10.10.70]: instance(0x813c410) created withLink State Update  
2002/05/09 14:12:33 OSPF: SEND[LS-Upd]: Begin send queue  
2002/05/09 14:12:33 OSPF: SEND[LS-Upd]: # of LSAs 1, destination 224.0.0.5  
2002/05/09 14:12:33 OSPF: SEND[LS-Upd]: End send queue  
2002/05/09 14:12:33 OSPF: SEND[LS-Upd]: To 224.0.0.5 via eth0:10.10.10.50.  
Examples  
ospfd# show debugging ospf  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf  
Use the show ip ospf command to display general information about all OSPF routing processes. Include the processID parameter  
with this command to display information about specified instances.  
Command Syntax  
show ip ospf  
show ip ospf PROCESSID  
PROCESSID = <0-65535> The ID of the router process for which information will be displayed. If this  
parameter is included, only the information for the specified routing process is displayed.  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
The following are sample outputs from the show ip ospf command with and without the process ID parameter. Notice that the first  
output (without process ID), shows information about both instances and the second and third outputs show information only  
about the instances specified by the process ID.  
ospfd# show ip ospf  
OSPF Routing Process 1, Router ID: 10.10.11.60  
Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes  
This implementation conforms to RFC2328  
RFC1583Compatibility flag is disabled  
Opaque-LSA capability is on  
SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs  
Refresh timer 10 secs  
Number of external LSA 0  
Number of non-default external LSA 0  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
External LSA database is unlimited.  
Number of areas attached to this router: 1  
Area ID: 0.0.0.1  
Shortcutting mode: Default, S-bit consensus: ok  
Number of interfaces in this area: Total: 1, Active: 1  
Number of fully adjacent neighbors in this area: 0  
Area has no authentication  
Number of full virtual adjacencies going through this area: 0  
SPF algorithm executed 1 times  
Number of LSA 1  
OSPF Routing Process 100, Router ID: 10.10.11.60  
Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes  
This implementation conforms to RFC2328  
RFC1583Compatibility flag is disabled  
Opaque-LSA capability is on  
SPF schedule delay 0 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 0 secs  
Refresh timer 10 secs  
Number of external LSA 0  
Number of non-default external LSA 0  
External LSA database is unlimited.  
Number of areas attached to this router: 1  
Area ID: 0.0.0.0 (Backbone)  
Number of interfaces in this area: Total: 0, Active: 0  
Number of fully adjacent neighbors in this area: 0  
Area has no authentication  
SPF algorithm executed 1 times  
Number of LSA 1  
ospfd# show ip ospf 1  
OSPF Routing Process 1, Router ID: 10.10.11.60  
Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes  
This implementation conforms to RFC2328  
RFC1583Compatibility flag is disabled  
Opaque-LSA capability is on  
SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs  
Refresh timer 10 secs  
Number of external LSA 0  
Number of non-default external LSA 0  
External LSA database is unlimited.  
Number of areas attached to this router: 1  
Area ID: 0.0.0.1  
Shortcutting mode: Default, S-bit consensus: ok  
Number of interfaces in this area: Total: 1, Active: 1  
Number of fully adjacent neighbors in this area: 0  
Area has no authentication  
Number of full virtual adjacencies going through this area: 0  
SPF algorithm executed 1 times  
Number of LSA 1  
ospfd# show ip ospf 100  
OSPF Routing Process 100, Router ID: 10.10.11.60  
Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes  
This implementation conforms to RFC2328  
RFC1583Compatibility flag is disabled  
Opaque-LSA capability is on  
SPF schedule delay 0 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 0 secs  
Refresh timer 10 secs  
Number of external LSA 0  
Number of non-default external LSA 0  
External LSA database is unlimited.  
Number of areas attached to this router: 1  
Area ID: 0.0.0.0 (Backbone)  
Number of interfaces in this area: Total: 0, Active: 0  
Number of fully adjacent neighbors in this area: 0  
Area has no authentication  
SPF algorithm executed 1 times  
Number of LSA 1  
Examples  
ospfd# show ip ospf  
ospfd# show ip ospf 100  
Related Commands  
router ospf  
show ip ospf border-routers  
Use the show ip ospf border-routers command to display the ABRs and ASBRs for all OSPF instances. Include the process ID  
188  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
parameter with this command to view data about specified instances.  
Command Syntax  
show ip ospf border-routers  
show ip ospf PROCESSID border-routers  
PROCESSID = <0-65535> The ID of the router process for which information will be displayed.  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
This is a sample output from the show ip ospf border-routers command.  
ospfd# show ip ospf border-routers  
OSPF process 100  
============ OSPF router routing table =============  
R
10.10.10.70  
[10] area: 0.0.0.0, ASBR  
via 10.10.10.10, eth0  
Examples  
ospfd# show ip ospf border-routers  
ospfd# show ip ospf 721 border-routers  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf database  
Use this command to display a database summary for OSPF information. This command displays BGP tags for prefixes.  
Include the process ID parameter with this command to display information about specified instances.  
Command Syntax  
show ip ospf database(self-originate|max-age)  
show ip ospf PROCESSID database (self-originate|max-age)  
PROCESSID = <0-65535> The ID of the router process for which information will be displayed.  
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.  
max-age Displays LSAs in MaxAge list.  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
The following are sample outputs from the show ip ospf database command with and without the process ID parameter. Notice  
that the first output (without process ID), shows database information about both the instances and the second and third outputs  
show database information only about the instances specified by the process ID. The last two displays show the use of the self-  
originate and max-age parameters.  
ospfd# show ip ospf database  
OSPF Router process 1 with ID (10.10.11.60)  
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)  
Link ID  
10.10.11.60  
ADV Router  
10.10.11.60  
Age Seq#  
32 0x80000002 0x472b 1  
CkSum Link count  
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.60)  
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)  
Link ID  
10.10.11.60  
ADV Router  
10.10.11.60  
Age Seq#  
219 0x80000001 0x4f5d 0  
CkSum Link count  
ospfd# show ip ospf 1 database  
OSPF Router process 1 with ID (10.10.11.60)  
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)  
Link ID  
10.10.11.60  
ADV Router  
10.10.11.60  
Age Seq#  
43 0x80000002 0x472b 1  
CkSum Link count  
ospfd# show ip ospf 100 database  
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.60)  
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)  
Link ID  
10.10.11.60  
ADV Router  
10.10.11.60  
Age Seq#  
244 0x80000001 0x4f5d 0  
CkSum Link count  
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate  
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)  
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)  
Link ID  
10.10.11.50  
ADV Router  
10.10.11.50  
Age Seq#  
20 0x80000007 0x65c3 2  
CkSum Link count  
Area-Local Opaque-LSA (Area 0.0.0.1 )  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Link ID  
67.1.4.217  
ADV Router  
10.10.11.50  
Age Seq#  
37 0x80000001 0x2129 66777  
CkSum Opaque ID  
AS-Global Opaque-LSA  
Link ID  
67.1.4.217  
ADV Router  
10.10.11.50  
Age Seq#  
37 0x80000001 0x2daa 66777  
CkSum Opaque ID  
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age  
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)  
MaxAge Link States:  
Examples  
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate  
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate  
ospfd# show ip 1 ospf database max-age  
ospfd# show ip 100 ospf database router adv-router 2.3.4.5  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf database asbr-summary  
Use the show ip ospf database asbr-summary command to display information about the Autonomous System  
Boundary Router (ASBR) summary LSAs.  
Command Syntax  
show ip ospf database asbr-summary (A.B.C.D)(self-originate|ADVROUTER)  
ADVROUTER = adv-router A.B.C.D  
adv-router Displays all the LSAs of the specified router.  
A.B.C.D A link state ID (as an IP address).  
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
Examples  
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate  
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate  
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age  
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 1.2.3.4 adv-router 2.3.4.5  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf database external  
Use this command to display information about the external LSAs.  
Command Syntax  
show ip ospf database external (A.B.C.D)(self-originate|ADVROUTER)  
ADVROUTER = adv-router A.B.C.D  
adv-router Displays all the LSAs of the specified router.  
A.B.C.D A link state ID (as an IP address).  
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
This is a sample output from the show ip ospf database external command with the self-originate option selected.  
ospfd# show ip ospf database external self-originate  
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)  
AS External Link States  
LS age: 298  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
LS Type: AS-external-LSA  
Link State ID: 10.10.100.0 (External Network Number)  
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50  
LS Seq Number: 80000001  
Checksum: 0x7033  
Length: 36  
Network Mask: /24  
Metric Type: 2 (Larger than any link state path)  
190  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
TOS: 0  
Metric: 20  
Forward Address: 10.10.11.50  
External Route Tag: 0  
Examples  
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate  
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate  
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age  
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 1.2.3.4 adv-router 2.3.4.5  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf database network  
Use the show ip ospf database network command to display information about the network LSAs.  
Command Syntax  
show ip ospf database network (A.B.C.D)(self-originate|ADVROUTER)  
ADVROUTER = adv-router A.B.C.D  
adv-router Displays all the LSAs of the specified router.  
A.B.C.D A link state ID (as an IP address).  
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
The following is a sample output from the show ip ospf database network command, with and without the advrouter  
option selected:  
ospfd# show ip ospf database network  
OSPF Router process 200 with ID (192.30.30.2)  
Net Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)  
LS age: 1175  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
LS Type: network-LSA  
Link State ID: 192.10.10.9 (address of Designated Router)  
Advertising Router: 192.30.30.3  
LS Seq Number: 80000002  
Checksum: 0xdfb1  
Length: 32  
Network Mask: /24  
Attached Router: 192.20.20.1  
Attached Router: 192.30.30.3  
LS age: 1327  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
LS Type: network-LSA  
Link State ID: 192.20.20.2 (address of Designated Router)  
Advertising Router: 192.20.20.2  
LS Seq Number: 8000000d  
Checksum: 0xbce6  
Length: 32  
Network Mask: /24  
Attached Router: 192.20.20.1  
Attached Router: 192.20.20.2  
LS age: 1278  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
LS Type: network-LSA  
Link State ID: 192.30.30.3 (address of Designated Router)  
Advertising Router: 192.30.30.3  
Advertising Router: 192.30.30.3  
LS Seq Number: 80000001  
Checksum: 0x0556  
Length: 32  
Network Mask: /24  
Attached Router: 192.30.30.2  
Attached Router: 192.30.30.3  
LS age: 1436  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
LS Type: network-LSA  
Link State ID: 192.40.40.2 (address of Designated Router)  
Advertising Router: 192.20.20.2  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
LS Seq Number: 8000000e  
Checksum: 0xf173  
Length: 32  
Network Mask: /24  
Attached Router: 192.20.20.2  
Attached Router: 192.30.30.2  
ospfd# show ip ospf database network adv-router 192.30.30.3  
OSPF Router process 200 with ID (192.30.30.2)  
Net Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)  
LS age: 1387  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
LS Type: network-LSA  
Link State ID: 192.10.10.9 (address of Designated Router)  
Advertising Router: 192.30.30.3  
LS Seq Number: 80000001  
Checksum: 0xe1b0  
Length: 32  
Network Mask: /24  
Attached Router: 192.20.20.1  
Attached Router: 192.30.30.3  
LS age: 1648  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
LS Type: network-LSA  
Link State ID: 192.30.30.3 (address of Designated Router)  
Advertising Router: 192.30.30.3  
LS Seq Number: 8000000f  
Checksum: 0xe864  
Length: 32  
Network Mask: /24  
Attached Router: 192.30.30.2  
Attached Router: 192.30.30.3  
Examples  
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate  
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate  
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age  
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 1.2.3.4 adv-router 2.3.4.5  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf database opaque-area  
Use the show ip ospf database opaque-area command to display information about the area-local (link state type 10) scope LSAs.  
Type-10 Opaque LSAs are not flooded beyond the borders of their associated area.  
Command Syntax  
show ip ospf database opaque-area (A.B.C.D)(self-originate|ADVROUTER)  
ADVROUTER = adv-router A.B.C.D  
adv-router Displays all the LSAs of the specified router.  
A.B.C.D A link state ID (as an IP address).  
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
The following is a sample output from the show ip ospf database opaque-area command, with the selforiginate option selected.  
ospfd# show ip ospf database opaque-area self-originate  
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)  
Area-Local Opaque-LSA (Area 0.0.0.0)  
LS age: 262  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
LS Type: Area-Local Opaque-LSA  
Link State ID: 10.0.25.176 (Area-Local Opaque-Type/ID)  
Opaque Type: 10  
Opaque ID: 6576  
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50  
LS Seq Number: 80000001  
Checksum: 0xb413  
Length: 26  
Examples  
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate  
192  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate  
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age  
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 1.2.3.4 adv-router 2.3.4.5  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf database opaque-link  
Use the show ip ospf database opaque-link command to display information about the link-state type 9 LSAs.  
This type denotes a link-local scope. The LSAs are not flooded beyond the local network.  
Command Syntax  
show ip ospf database opaque-link (A.B.C.D)(self-originate|ADVROUTER)  
ADVROUTER = adv-router A.B.C.D  
adv-router Displays all the LSAs of the specified router.  
A.B.C.D A link state ID (as an IP address).  
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
The following is a sample output from the show ip ospf database opaque-link command, with a link-state  
selected.  
ospfd# show ip ospf database opaque-link 10.0.220.247  
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)  
Link-Local Opaque-LSA (Link hme0:10.10.10.50)  
LS age: 276  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
LS Type: Link-Local Opaque-LSA  
Link State ID: 10.0.220.247 (Link-Local Opaque-Type/ID)  
Opaque Type: 10  
Opaque ID: 56567  
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50  
LS Seq Number: 80000001  
Checksum: 0x744e  
Length: 26  
Link-Local Opaque-LSA (Link hme1:10.10.11.50)  
Examples  
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate  
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate  
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age  
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 1.2.3.4 adv-router 2.3.4.5  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf database router  
Use the show ip ospf database router command to display information only about the router LSAs.  
Command Syntax  
show ip ospf database router (A.B.C.D)(self-originate|ADVROUTER)  
ADVROUTER = adv-router A.B.C.D  
adv-router Displays all the LSAs of the specified router.  
A.B.C.D A link state ID (as an IP address).  
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
The following is a sample output from the show ip ospf database router command, with the ip address selected.  
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 10.10.11.50  
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)  
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)  
LS age: 878  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
Flags: 0x3 : ABR ASBR  
LS Type: router-LSA  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Link State ID: 10.10.11.50  
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50  
LS Seq Number: 80000004  
Checksum: 0xe39e  
Length: 36  
Number of Links: 1  
Link connected to: Stub Network  
(Link ID) Network/subnet number: 10.10.10.0  
(Link Data) Network Mask: 255.255.255.0  
Number of TOS metrics: 0  
TOS 0 Metric: 10  
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)  
LS age: 877  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
Flags: 0x3 : ABR ASBR  
LS Type: router-LSA  
Link State ID: 10.10.11.50  
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50  
LS Seq Number: 80000003  
Checksum: 0xee93  
Length: 36  
Number of Links: 1  
Link connected to: Stub Network  
(Link ID) Network/subnet number: 10.10.11.0  
(Link Data) Network Mask: 255.255.255.0  
Number of TOS metrics: 0  
TOS 0 Metric: 10  
Examples  
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate  
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate  
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age  
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 1.2.3.4 adv-router 2.3.4.5  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf database summary  
Use the show ip ospf database summary command to display information about the summary LSAs.  
Command Syntax  
show ip ospf database summary (A.B.C.D)(self-originate|ADVROUTER)  
ADVROUTER = adv-router A.B.C.D  
adv-router Displays all the LSAs of the specified router.  
A.B.C.D A link state ID (as an IP address).  
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
The following are the sample outputs from the show ip ospf database summary command, using the selforiginate,  
adv-router and ip address options.  
ospfd# show ip ospf database summary 10.10.10.0  
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)  
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)  
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)  
LS age: 1124  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
LS Type: summary-LSA  
Link State ID: 10.10.10.0 (summary Network Number)  
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50  
LS Seq Number: 80000001  
Checksum: 0x41a2  
Length: 28  
Network Mask: /24  
TOS: 0 Metric: 10  
ospfd# show ip ospf database summary self-originate  
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)  
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)  
LS age: 1061  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
194  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
LS Type: summary-LSA  
Link State ID: 10.10.11.0 (summary Network Number)  
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50  
LS Seq Number: 80000001  
Checksum: 0x36ac  
Length: 28  
Network Mask: /24  
TOS: 0 Metric: 10  
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)  
LS age: 1061  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
LS Type: summary-LSA  
Link State ID: 10.10.11.0 (summary Network Number)  
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50  
LS Seq Number: 80000001  
Checksum: 0x36ac  
Length: 28  
Network Mask: /24  
TOS: 0 Metric: 10  
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)  
LS age: 1061  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
LS Type: summary-LSA  
Link State ID: 10.10.10.0 (summary Network Number)  
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50  
LS Seq Number: 80000001  
Checksum: 0x41a2  
Length: 28  
Network Mask: /24  
TOS: 0 Metric: 10  
ospfd# show ip ospf database summary adv-router 10.10.11.50  
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)  
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)  
LS age: 989  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
LS Type: summary-LSA  
Link State ID: 10.10.11.0 (summary Network Number)  
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50  
LS Seq Number: 80000001  
Checksum: 0x36ac  
Length: 28  
Network Mask: /24  
TOS: 0 Metric: 10  
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)  
LS age: 989  
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)  
LS Type: summary-LSA  
Link State ID: 10.10.11.0 (summary Network Number)  
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50  
LS Seq Number: 80000001  
Checksum: 0x36ac  
Length: 28  
Network Mask: /24  
TOS: 0 Metric: 10  
Examples  
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate  
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate  
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age  
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 1.2.3.4 adv-router 2.3.4.5  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf interface  
Use the show ip ospf interface command to display interface information for OSPF.  
Command Syntax  
show ip ospf interface IFNAME  
IFNAME= An alphanumeric string that is the interface name.  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
The following is a sample output from the show ip ospf interface command.  
ospfd# show ip ospf interface hme0  
hme0 is up, line protocol is up  
Internet Address 10.10.10.50/24, Area 0.0.0.0  
Router ID 10.10.11.50, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 10  
Transmit Delay is 5 sec, State Waiting, Priority 1  
No designated router on this network  
No backup designated router on this network  
Timer intervals configured, Hello 35, Dead 35, Wait 35, Retransmit 5  
Hello due in 00:00:16  
Neighbor Count is 0, Adjacent neighbor count is 0  
Examples  
ospfd# show ip ospf interface myifname  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf neighbor  
Use the show ip ospf neighbor command to display information on OSPF neighbors. Include the process ID parameter with this  
command to display information about specified instances.  
Command Syntax  
show ip ospf neighbor A.B.C.D|all|DETAIL|INTERFACE  
show ip ospf PROCESSID neighbor A.B.C.D|all|DETAIL|INTERFACE  
PROCESSID = <0-65535> The ID of the router process for which information will be displayed.  
A.B.C.D = A.B.C.D (detail) Neighbor ID.  
all = Include downstatus neighbor  
DETAIL = detail (all) Detail of all neighbors  
INTERFACE = Interface (A.B.C.D)  
A.B.C.D = Address of the interface  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
The following are sample outputs from the show ip ospf neighbor command with and without the process IDparameter. Notice that  
the first output (without process ID), shows database information about both the instances and the second and third outputs show  
database information only about the instances specified by the process ID. The last two displays show the use of the detail and all  
parameters.  
ospfd# show ip ospf neighbor  
OSPF process 1:  
Neighbor ID  
RqstL DBsmL  
10.10.11.50  
Pri State Dead Time Address Interface  
RXmtL  
5
Full/DR  
00:00:40 10.10.10.50  
eth1:10.10.10.90  
0
0
0
OSPF process 100:  
Neighbor ID  
RqstL DBsmL  
10.10.11.50  
Pri State  
Dead Time Address  
00:00:40 10.10.10.50  
Interface  
RXmtL  
0
5
Full/DR  
eth2:10.10.11.90  
0
0
ospfd# show ip ospf 1 neighbor  
OSPF process 1:  
Neighbor ID  
RqstL DBsmL  
10.10.11.50  
Pri State  
Dead Time Address  
00:00:40 10.10.10.50  
Interface  
RXmtL  
0
5
Full/DR  
eth1:10.10.10.90  
0
0
ospfd# show ip ospf 100 neighbor  
OSPF process 100:  
Neighbor ID  
RqstL DBsmL  
10.10.11.50  
Pri State  
Dead Time Address  
00:00:40 10.10.10.50  
Interface  
RXmtL  
0
5
Full/DR  
eth2:10.10.11.90  
0
0
ospfd# show ip ospf neighbor all  
OSPF process 100:  
Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address  
Interface  
RXmtL RqstL DBsmL  
10.10.11.51  
1
Full/DR 00:00:38 10.10.10.10 hme0:10.10.10.50  
0
0
0
196  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
10.10.11.51  
ospfd#  
1
Full/DR 00:00:38 10.10.11.10 hme1:10.10.11.50  
0
0
0
ospfd# show ip ospf neighbor detail  
Neighbor 10.10.11.51, interface address 10.10.10.10  
In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface hme0  
Neighbor priority is 1, State is Full, 6 state changes  
DR is 10.10.10.10, BDR is 10.10.10.50  
Options 66 *|O|-|-|-|-|E|-  
Dead timer due in 00:00:32  
Database Summary List 0  
Link State Request List 0  
Link State Retransmission List 0  
Thread Inactivity Timer on  
Thread Database Description Retransmision off  
Thread Link State Request Retransmission off  
Thread Link State Update Retransmission on  
Neighbor 10.10.11.51, interface address 10.10.11.10  
In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface hme1  
Neighbor priority is 1, State is Full, 6 state changes  
DR is 10.10.11.10, BDR is 10.10.11.50  
Options 66 *|O|-|-|-|-|E|-  
Dead timer due in 00:00:32  
Database Summary List 0  
Link State Request List 0  
Link State Retransmission List 0  
Thread Inactivity Timer on  
Thread Database Description Retransmision off  
Thread Link State Request Retransmission off  
Thread Link State Update Retransmission on  
Neighbor 10.10.11.51, interface address 10.10.11.10  
In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface hme1  
Neighbor priority is 1, State is Full, 6 state changes  
DR is 10.10.11.10, BDR is 10.10.11.50  
Options 66 *|O|-|-|-|-|E|-  
Dead timer due in 00:00:32  
Database Summary List 0  
Link State Request List 0  
Link State Retransmission List 0  
Thread Inactivity Timer on  
Thread Database Description Retransmision off  
Thread Link State Request Retransmission off  
Thread Link State Update Retransmission on  
Examples  
ospfd# show ip ospf neighbor detail  
ospfd# show ip ospf neighbor 1.2.3.4  
ospfd# show ip ospf neighbor myifname detail all  
Related Commands  
show ip ospf route  
Use the show ip ospf route command to display the OSPF routing table. Include the process ID parameter with this command to  
display the OSPF routing table for specified instances.  
Command Syntax  
show ip ospf route  
show ip ospf PROCESSID route  
PROCESSID = <0-65535> The ID of the router process for which information will be displayed. If this  
parameter is included, only the information for this specified routing process is displayed.  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
The following are sample outputs from the show ip ospf route command with and without the process ID parameter. Notice that  
the first output (without process ID), shows information about both the instances and the second and third outputs show  
information only about the instances specified by the process ID.  
ospfd# show ip ospf route  
OSPF process 100:  
============ OSPF network routing table ============  
N
10.10.10.0/24  
[10] area: 0.0.0.0  
directly attached to eth1  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
============ OSPF router routing table =============  
============ OSPF external routing table ===========  
OSPF process 110:  
============ OSPF network routing table ============  
N
10.10.11.0/24  
[10] area: 0.0.0.1  
directly attached to eth2  
============ OSPF router routing table =============  
============ OSPF external routing table ===========  
ospfd#  
ospfd# show ip ospf 100 route  
OSPF process 100:  
============ OSPF network routing table ============  
N
10.10.10.0/24  
[10] area: 0.0.0.0  
directly attached to eth1  
============ OSPF router routing table =============  
============ OSPF external routing table ===========  
ospfd#  
ospfd# show ip ospf 110 route  
OSPF process 110:  
============ OSPF network routing table ============  
N
10.10.11.0/24  
[10] area: 0.0.0.1  
directly attached to eth2  
============ OSPF router routing table =============  
============ OSPF external routing table ===========  
ospfd#  
Examples  
ospfd# show ip ospf route  
Related Commands  
show ip protocols  
Use the show ip protocols command to display OSPF process parameters and statistics.  
Command Syntax  
show ip protocols  
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode  
Usage  
This is an example of the output from the show ip protocols command:  
ospfd# show ip protocols  
Routing Protocol is "ospf 200"  
Invalid after 0 seconds, hold down 0, flushed after 0  
Outgoing update filter list for all interfaces is  
Redistributed kernel filterd by filter1  
Incoming update filter list for all interfaces is  
Redistributing: kernel  
Routing for Networks:  
192.30.30.0/24  
192.40.40.0/24  
Routing Information Sources:  
Gateway  
Distance: (default is 110)  
Address  
Distance  
Last Update  
Distance List  
Mask  
Examples  
ospfd# show ip protocols  
show memory all  
Use the show memory all command to display all memory statistics.  
Command Syntax  
show memory all  
Command Mode  
198  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Priviledged Exec mode and Exec mode  
Usage  
Following is a sample output of the show memory all command showing information about all the routing protocols.  
Please note that this is not the complete output but a sample of the output.  
ospfd# show memory all  
Memory type  
: Alloc count Alloc memory  
===========================================================  
Hash  
:
1
20  
64  
0
Hash Index  
Hash Bucket  
Thread master  
Thread  
Link List  
Link Node  
:
:
:
1
0
1
196  
:
:
28  
394  
382  
1008  
7880  
4584  
56  
:
Buffer  
:
2
Route node  
VR data block  
Config password  
Config handle  
Temporary memory  
Access List  
Label pool server  
Label pool server  
:
0
0
0
0
:
:
1
6
:
1
16  
:
1
32  
:
0
0
:
:
0
0
0
0
-----------------------------------------------  
ZebOS RIB  
:
0
0
ZebOS IPv4 Static  
ZebOS IPv6 Static  
ZebOS RA  
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
ZebOS RA conf  
ZebOS RA Prefix  
ZebOS Home Agent  
:
:
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
-----------------------------------------------  
RIP structure  
RIP route info  
RIP interface  
RIP i/f name  
RIP passive i/f  
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
-----------------------------------------------  
RIPng structure  
RIPng route info  
RIPng aggregate info  
RIPng interface  
RIPng i/f name  
:
:
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
:
:
0
0
0
0
-----------------------------------------------  
OSPF table  
OSPF node  
OSPF prefix  
:
47  
26  
26  
780  
764  
247  
:
:
-----------------------------------------------  
OSPF structure  
OSPF area  
:
:
1
1
2
0
1600  
108  
368  
0
0
0
88  
24  
52  
48  
:
OSPF interface  
OSPF neighbor  
OSPF SPF vertex  
OSPF SPF nexthop  
OSPF route  
OSPF path  
OSPF LSA  
OSPF LSA data  
OSPF LSDB  
OSPF distance  
:
:
:
0
0
:
:
:
2
2
1
:
1
4
:
576  
0
:
0
-----------------------------------------------  
OSPF network  
:
2
0
0
0
22  
0
0
OSPF virtual-link  
OSPF if params  
OSPF passive if  
:
:
:
0
-----------------------------------------------  
BGP peer  
-----------------------------------------------  
:
0
0
BGP adjacency  
BGP advertise  
BGP advertise attr  
BGP adjin  
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
:
:
0
0
-----------------------------------------------  
BGP attribute  
:
0
0
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
BGP aspath  
:
0
0
BGP aspath seg  
BGP aspath str  
Community  
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
:
-----------------------------------------------  
LDP structure  
LDP interface  
LDP Adjacencies  
LDP Sessions  
LDP FECs  
:
:
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
:
:
0
0
0
0
-----------------------------------------------  
RSVP structure  
RSVP interface  
:
:
0
0
0
0
RSVP write queue node  
RSVP route record object  
:
:
0
0
0
0
-----------------------------------------------  
ISIS node  
ISIS table  
vprefix  
:
0
0
0
0
:
:
0
0
ISIS instance  
ISIS neighbor  
:
0
0
0
0
:
Examples  
ospfd# show memory all  
Related Commands  
show memory lib, show memory ospf  
show memory lib  
Use the show memory lib command to display memory statistics for the ZebOS library.  
Command Syntax  
show memory lib  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode and Exec mode  
Usage  
The following is a sample output from the show memory lib command displaying ZebOS library statistics.  
ospfd# show memory lib  
Memory type  
: Alloc count Alloc memory  
===========================================================  
Hash  
Hash Index  
:
1
20  
64  
:
1
Hash Bucket  
Thread master  
Thread  
Link List  
Link Node  
Buffer  
Buffer backet  
Buffer data  
:
:
0
1
0
196  
:
:
28  
1008  
7880  
4584  
56  
192  
394  
382  
:
:
2
:
8
:
8
1724  
Buffer iov  
:
0
0
Prefix  
:
156  
3120  
Prefix IPv4  
Prefix IPv6  
Route table  
Route node  
VR data block  
User data  
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
:
:
0
:
0
RMM data block  
RMM Message  
RMM dummy client  
Smux subtree  
Command strvec  
Command desc  
Config memory  
Config login  
Config password  
Config handle  
Temporary memory  
Access List  
Access List Str  
Access Filter  
Prefix List  
:
:
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
0
0
:
:
:
6761  
3396  
3
117184  
27168  
58  
0
6
16  
:
0
:
1
:
1
:
1
32  
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
:
:
200  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
Prefix List Str  
Prefix List Entry  
Route map  
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
:
Route map name  
Route map index  
Route map rule  
Route map rule str  
Stream  
:
:
0
0
0
0
:
:
0
0
0
0
:
:
2
0
48  
0
Key  
Key chain  
:
0
0
VTY  
VTY Path  
:
2
239896  
0
:
0
Label block node  
Label pool server  
Label pool server  
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
Examples  
ospfd# show memory lib  
Related Commands  
show memory all, show memory ospf  
show memory ospf  
Use the show memory ospf command to display memory statistics for the OSPF protocol.  
Command Syntax  
show memory ospf  
Command Mode  
Priviledged Exec mode and Exec mode  
Usage  
The following is a sample output from the show memory ospf command displaying OSPF statistics  
ospfd# show memory ospf  
Memory type  
: Alloc count Alloc memory  
===========================================================  
OSPF table  
OSPF node  
OSPF prefix  
:
102  
53  
53  
1660  
1528  
515  
:
:
-----------------------------------------------  
OSPF structure  
OSPF area  
:
1
2
2
2
1600  
216  
368  
336  
0
:
OSPF interface  
OSPF neighbor  
OSPF SPF vertex  
OSPF SPF nexthop  
OSPF route  
:
:
:
0
0
:
0
:
:
3
3
132  
36  
OSPF path  
OSPF LSA  
OSPF LSA data  
OSPF LSDB  
OSPF LS Request  
OSPF packet  
OSPF FIFO queue  
OSPF extern info  
OSPF distance  
:
7
7
9
364  
224  
1296  
0
16  
24  
32  
0
:
:
:
0
:
1
:
2
:
:
1
0
-----------------------------------------------  
OSPF network  
:
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
22  
0
0
0
0
OSPF virtual-link  
OSPF if params  
OSPF passive if  
OSPF auth key  
OSPF crypt key  
OSPF area range  
OSPF summary addr  
OSPF static nbr  
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
-----------------------------------------------  
OSPF opaque data  
OSPF Opq-LSA show  
OSPF notifier  
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
OSPF description  
OSPF API data  
OSPF message  
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
OSPF tmp mem  
:
2
16  
Examples  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dual Trunk E1 Router  
ospfd# show memory ospf  
Related Commands  
show memory all, show memory lib  
summary-address  
Use the summary-address command to summarize or suppress external routes with the specified address range.  
Command Syntax  
summary-address A.B.C.D/M (not-advertise)(tag <0-4294967295>)  
A.B.C.D/M = The range of addresses given as IPv4 starting address and a mask indicating the range.  
not-advertise Suppresses external routes.  
tag <0-4294967295> The default tag value is 0.  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
An address range is a pairing of an address and a mask that is almost the same as IP network number. For example, if the specified  
address range is 192.168.0.0/255.255.240.0, it matches: 192.168.1.0/24, 192.168.4.0/22, 192.168.8.128/25 and so on.  
Redistributing routes from other protocols into OSPF requires the router to advertise each route individually in an external LSA.  
Use summary address command to advertise one summary route for all redistributed routes covered by a specified network address  
and mask. This helps decrease the size of the OSPF link state database.  
Examples  
The following example uses the summary-address command to aggregate external LSAs that match the network  
172.16.0.0/24 and assign a Tag value of 3.  
ospfd# configure terminal  
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100  
ospfd(config-router)# summary-address 172.16.0.0/16 tag 3  
Related Commands  
timers spf  
Use the timers spf command to adjust route-calculation timers.  
Use the no parameter of this command to return to the default timer values.  
Command Syntax  
timers spf SPF-DELAY spf-holdtime  
no timers spf SPF-DELAY SPF-HOLDTIME  
SPF-DELAY= <0-4294967295> Specifies the delay between receiving a change to SPF calculation.The  
default spf-delay value is 5 seconds  
SPF-HOLDTIME= <0-4294967295> Specifies hold time between consecutive SPF calculations. The default  
spf-holdtime value is 10 seconds.  
Command Mode  
Router mode  
Usage  
The timer spf command configures the delay time between the receipt of a topology change and the calculation of the  
Shortest Path First (SPF). This command also configure the hold time between two consecutive SPF calculations.  
Examples  
timers spf 67295 7295  
Related Commands  
202  
SALES: 0870 90 10 750  
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Index  
F
A
telephone numbers 16-129  
AC power installation 3-18  
access rights 4-32  
Access Router  
configuration overview 5-33, 6-47, 7-53  
Configuring Packet Processing Mode 6-52, 7-54  
Configuring Static Routes 7-55  
Configuring the Firewall 6-52, 8-63  
Setting ID, Date, and Network Timing 5-35  
AIS  
DLC IBC (E1 platform) Link Loss Alarm 16-129  
download utility 15-103  
downloading software  
abnormal termination 15-104  
download utility 15-103  
error indicators 15-104  
setting up TFTP 15-103  
user aborted 15-105  
Xmodem setup 15-103  
network AIS received alarm 16-129  
alarms  
configuring 11-85  
E
EFS events  
display 11-85  
Payload Loopback Actuated 10-78  
EFS Field, calculating EFS 4-23  
Menu 8 11-86  
SNMP mode 11-85  
assigning passwords 4-32  
attaching to a terminal  
COMM 4-26  
Event Log 10-78  
standalone 4-26  
F
front panel  
tests 9-65  
C
carrier loss  
network carrier loss alarm 16-128  
COMM PORT 16-130  
COMM port  
G
Grounding 3-19  
attaching to terminal 4-26  
command line help 17-138  
configuring  
H
Hyperterm 4-27  
alarm conditions 11-85  
CRC Errors 16-131  
I
in-band  
network registers  
Current Interval Time 10-78  
Current Test 16-130  
24 hour detail 10-81  
In-band CRC Error Threshold 16-130  
In-band Link Loss Alarm 16-129  
in-band management 10-80  
installation  
D
data  
performance data compliance 10-75  
Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 16-130  
delay monitoring 10-79  
diagnostics 9-65  
AC power 3-18  
mounting the unit on a tray 3-18  
tray cable requirements 3-19  
installing  
from terminal screen menus 9-70  
attaching to terminal 4-26  
Link Layer 9-71  
Loop Down Remote 9-67  
Loop Payload test 9-67  
Loop Up Remote 9-67  
loopback tests 9-66  
materials required 9-65  
Menu-9 9-70  
physical layer 9-70  
self test 9-65  
Dial Out Time Interval 16-129  
dial-out capability  
K
KERNEL Commands 17-152  
L
lamp test 9-69  
LEDs  
lamp test 9-69  
Link Layer diagnostics 9-71, 9-72  
link-based testing  
public packet networks 9-72  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
F
STATUS 5-41  
Physical Layer Diagnostics 9-70  
performing a test from 9-70  
pin assignment  
LMI Conditioning  
STATUS ENQUIRY 5-41  
communication port 14-102  
DE-9 to DB-25 14-102  
pin assignments  
logging in  
login messages 4-30  
network 14-101  
logging off 4-31  
Protocol Directory 10-81  
Protocol Distribution 10-82  
logging on  
from telnet connection 4-31  
logging on to the unit 4-27  
Loop Payload test 9-67  
loopback tests 9-66  
Q
QRSS 9-68  
M
R
Main Status 10-80  
network status 10-80  
Main status ?? to 16-118  
menus  
requirements  
tray cable 3-19  
RIP Command Reference 17-155  
RIP commands  
Menu-4F, Software Download 15-103  
Menu-6, Timeslot Configuration 4-31, 11-86  
Menu-8C, Miscellaneous Management Configuration 4-  
setting parameters 4-26  
monitoring status 10-80  
show debugging rip 17-159  
RMON-2 10-81  
Protocol Directory 10-81  
Protocol Distribution 10-82  
Router Configuration Overview 5-33, 6-47, 7-53  
S
N
Self Test  
navigating  
at power-up 3-18, 3-19  
terminal interface 4-26  
self test 9-65  
network  
troubleshooting 12-90  
network status 10-80  
non-disruptive testing 9-72  
Normal User Password 16-129  
Normal User password 4-32  
setting  
Unit ID 5-35  
setting up  
site requirements 3-17  
specifications 13-95  
standalone  
attaching to a terminal 4-26  
STATUS 5-41  
STATUS EnQUIRY 5-41  
Super User Password 16-129  
Super User password 4-32  
sync loss  
O
operating  
altitude 3-17  
humidity 3-17  
temperature 3-17  
operating environment 3-17  
P
passwords  
NET sync loss alarm 16-128  
assigning 4-32  
configuring Normal User and Superuser 16-129  
no passwords 4-32  
Pattern Tes 16-130  
pattern tests 9-68  
lamp test 9-69  
Performance Report  
performance reporting 10-76  
Performance Reports 10-76  
Carrier Registers  
T
TCP/IP  
delay monitoring 9-72  
technical specifications 13-95  
environmental 13-96  
performance 13-95  
physical 13-96  
power options 13-96  
reliability 13-96  
telnet  
logging on 4-31  
terminal interface  
navigating 4-26  
Current Interval 10-76  
Event Log 10-78  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F
time-out  
for terminal 16-129  
Timeout When Logged On 16-129  
Timeout When Not Logged On 16-129  
Top Talkers 10-81  
troubleshooting  
network problems 12-90  
passwords 4-32  
U
Unavailable Signal State 10-78  
Unit ID  
setting 5-35  
X
Xmodem 15-103  
XON/XOFF 16-130  
Y
yellow alarm  
network yellow received alarm 16-129  
Index  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Black Decker Blender FP1435 User Manual
Blanco Dishwasher BFDW8 User Manual
Bogen Musical Instrument CAM8 User Manual
Bosch Appliances Washer WFK 2401 User Manual
Broil King Food Warmer BR 5B User Manual
Campbell Hausfeld Air Compressor IN633200AV User Manual
Campbell Hausfeld Impact Driver CL155700AV User Manual
Campbell Hausfeld Staple Gun CHN10302 User Manual
Carson Car Amplifier SA 430 17 User Manual
Cisco Systems Network Card VIP4 User Manual